Cbcs-Computerscience-2018 220622 192641

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS
Under CBCS
(Applicable for Students admitted from Academic Year 2018-19)
B. Tech. Computer Science Engineering

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
SCHOOL OF COMPUTING SCIENCES

B.TECH – COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
HINDUSTAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE

VISION AND MISSION
MOTTO
“TO MAKE EVERY MAN A SUCCESS AND NO MAN A FAILURE.”
VISION
To be an International Institute of Excellence, providing a conducive environment
for education with a strong emphasis on innovation, quality, research and strategic
partnership blended with values and commitment to society.
MISSION
 To create an ecosystem for learning and world class research.
 To nurture a sense of creativity and innovation.
 To instill highest ethical standards and values with a sense of professionalism.
 To take up activities for the development of Society.
 To develop national and international collaboration and strategic partnership with
industry and institutes of excellence.
 To enable graduates to become future leaders and innovators.
VALUE STATEMENT
 Integrity, Innovation, Internationalization
DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING

VISION AND MISSION
VISION
To excel in Computer Science and Engineering education, research and project management by
empowering the students with strong conceptual knowledge.
MISSION
M1: To educate the students with basic foundation blocks of core and allied disciplines of Computer
Science and Engineering.
M2: To provide practical skills in the advancements of the Computer Science and Engineering field
required for the growing dynamic IT and ITES industries.
M3: To sculpt strong personal, technical, research, entrepreneurial, and leadership skills.
M4: To inculcate knowledge in lifelong learning, professional ethics and contribution to the
society.
1
B. Tech. Computer Science and Engineering

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEO)
The Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) of the Computer Science and Engineering are listed below:
The graduate after 3‐5 years of programme completion will
PEO1: Excel in his/her professional career and/or pursue higher education including
research by applying the knowledge of Computer Science and Engineering.
PEO2: Demonstrate the technical skills to analyze and design appropriate solutions for
problems with social consciousness and ethical values.
PEO3: Adapt themselves to organizational needs by understanding the dynamically
changing technologies.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (ALIGNED WITH GRADUATE ATTRIBUTES) (PO)
At the end of this program, graduates will be able to
PO1: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
PO2: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
PO3: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components
or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the
public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
PO4: Use research‐based knowledge and research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering
and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with
an understanding of the limitations.
PO6: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health,
safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
2
PO7: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development.
PO8: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
PO9: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and
in multidisciplinary settings.
PO10: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
PO11: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management
principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life‐long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSO)
At the end of this program, graduates will be able to execute the outcomes defined by
Professional body.
PSO1: To impart the basic knowledge and conceptual understanding of Computing through
mathematical and analytical skills
PSO2: To develop the skill set of the students in the domains of Cyber physical systems,
Algorithm design techniques and Enterprise systems security
PSO3: To inculcate the analytical knowledge of the students for innovative system design
using modern tools and techniques.
3
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR

B. TECH. / B. TECH. (HONS.) DEGREE PROGRAMME
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause No. Contents Page Number
I Preamble 5
II Definitions and Nomenclatures 5
1. Vision, Mission and Objectives 7
2. Admission 8
3. Student Discipline 9
4. Structure of the B.Tech. Degree Programme 9
5. Faculty Advisor 12
6. Registration for courses in a Semester 13
7. B.Tech.(Hons) 14
8. B.Tech. with Minor Specialization 14
9. Attendance 15
10. Assessment Procedure 15
11. Procedures for Course Repetition / Repeat Examinations 20
12. Progression to higher semester 22
13. Maximum Duration 23
14. Temporary Withdrawal 23
15. Declaration of results 23
16. Grading 25
17. Grade Sheet 26
18. Class and Division 26
19. Transfer of credits 27
20. Eligibility for Award of the degree 27
21. Change of Discipline 28
22. Power to modify 28
4
I. PREAMBLE
As per the recommendations of UGC, the Hindustan Institute of Technology and Science
(HITS) has introduced Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) from the academic year 2015‐
16. Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) is a proven, flexible mode of learning in higher
education which facilitates a student to have guided freedom in selecting his/her own
choices of courses in the curriculum for completing a degree program. This revision of
regulations, curriculum and syllabi has been carried out further to make it more flexible
and adaptive to the technology advancements happening in the world. CBCS offers a
flexible system of learning.
The system permits a student to
(i) Learn at their own pace through flexible registration process
(ii) Choose electives from a wide range of courses offered within and outside their
departments
(iii) Undergo additional courses and acquire more than required number of credits
to obtain B. Tech (Hons)
(iv) Undergo additional courses in their special areas of interest and earn additional
credits to obtain B. Tech with Minor Specialization
(v) Adopt an interdisciplinary approach in learning
(vi) Avail transfer of Credits
(vii) Gain Non – CGPA credits to enhance skill/employability by taking up additional
project work, entrepreneurship, co‐curricular and vocational training.
(viii) Make the best use of the expertise of available faculty.
(ix) Learn and earn credits through MOOC and Project Based Learning
(x) Enhance their Knowledge, Skill and Attitude through participation in innovative
Curriculum Design, Delivery and Assessments.
The Curriculum is designed to take into the factors listed in the Choice Based Credit
System (CBCS) with focus on Project Based Learning and Industrial Training so as to
enable the students become eligible and fully equipped for employment in industries
choose higher studies or entrepreneurship.
II. DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:
1. “Programme” means Degree Programme like B.Tech. Degree Programme.
2. “Discipline” means specialization or branch of B.Tech. Degree Programme, (e.g. Civil
Engineering).
3. “Course” means a theory or practical subject that is normally studied in a semester, (e.g.
Mathematics, Physics, etc.).
5
4. “Vice – Chancellor of HITS” means the Head of the Institution.

5. “Registrar” is the Head of all Academic and General Administration of the Institute.
6. “Dean Academics” means the authority of the University who is responsible for all
academic activities of various programmes and implementation of relevant rules of
these Regulations pertaining to the Academic Programmes.
7. “Controller of Examinations” means the authority of the University who is responsible
for all activities related to the University Examinations, publication of results, award of
grade sheets and degrees.
8. “Dean – Student Affairs” is responsible for all student related activities including
student discipline, extra and co – curricular activities, attendance and meetings with
class representatives, Student Council and parent – teacher meet.
9. “HoD” means the Head of the Department concerned.
10. “Institute” means Hindustan Institute of Technology and Science (HITS), Chennai.
11. “TCH” means Total Contact Hours – refers to the teaching – learning periods.
12. “DEC” means Department Exam Committee.
13. “BoS” means Board of Studies.
14. “BoM” means Board of Management.
15. “ACM” means Academic Council meeting the highest authoritative body for approval
for all Academic Policies.
16. “Class Teacher” is a faculty of the class who takes care of the attendance, academic
performance and the general conduct of the students of that class.
17. “CIA” is Continuous Internal Assessment which is assessed for every student for every
course during the semester.
18. “ESE” is End Semester Examination conducted by the Institute at the End of the
Semester for all the courses of that semester.
19. “AICTE” means All India Council for Technical Education.
20. “UGC” means University Grants Commission.
21. “MHRD” means Ministry of Human Resource Development, Govt. of India.
6
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR B. Tech. / B.Tech. (Hons.)

Under Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)
(Effective from Academic year 2018 - 19)
1.0 Vision, Mission and Objectives
The Vision of the Institute is “To make every man a success and no man a failure”.
1.1 The Mission of the institute is
 To create an ecosystem that promotes learning and world class research.
 To nurture creativity and innovation.
 To instil highest ethical standards and values.
 To pursue activities for the development of the Society.
 To develop national and international collaborations with institutes and industries of

eminence.
 To enable graduates to become future leaders and innovators.
Value Statement
Integrity, Innovation, Internationalization
1.2 Further, the Institute always strives
 To train our graduates with the latest and the best in the rapidly changing fields of
Architecture, Engineering, Technology, Management studies, Science and Humanities and
Liberal Arts.
 To develop graduates, with a global outlook, possessing Knowledge, Skills and Attitude and
capable of taking up challenging responsibilities in the respective fields.
 To mould our graduates as citizens with moral, ethical and social values so as to fulfil their
obligations to the nation and the society.
 To promote research in the field of Architecture, Engineering, Technology, Management
studies, Science and Humanities and Liberal Arts and Allied disciplines.
1.3 Aims and Objectives of the Institute are focused on

 Providing state of the art education in Engineering, Technology, Applied Sciences and
Management studies.
 Keeping pace with the ever – changing technological scenario and help the graduates to gain
proper direction to emerge as competent professionals fully aware of their commitment to
the society and the nation.
 To inculcate a flair for Research, Development and Entrepreneurship.
7
2.0 Admission
The admission policy and procedure shall be decided from time to time by the Board of
Management (BOM) of the Institute, based on the guidelines issued by the UGC/ Ministry of
Human Resource Development (MHRD), Government of India. The number of seats in each
of the B. Tech. degree programme will be decided by the Board of Management of the
Institute as per the directives of AICTE/ UGC / MHRD, Government of India, taking into
account, the market demands. Seats are also made available up to 20% of the sanctioned
intake for Non – Resident Indians and foreign nationals, who satisfy the admission eligibility
norms of the Institute.
2.1. Eligibility for Admission
(i) Regular Entry

Passed 10 + 2 examination with Physics and Mathematics as compulsory subjects along
with one of the other subjects as Chemistry/ Biotechnology/ Biology/ Technical
Vocational course.
The candidates should have obtained the minimum marks as per AICTE norms.
(ii) Lateral Entry

The candidates possessing a Diploma in Engineering/Technology in the relevant
discipline of specialization with minimum 50% marks awarded by the State Boards of
Technical Education, India or any other competent authority as accepted by the Board
of Management of the Institute as equivalent thereto are eligible for admission to the
3rd Semester of the B. Tech degree programme.
2.2 The candidate has to fulfil all the prescribed admission requirements / norms of
the Institute.
2.3. In all matters relating to admission to the B. Tech degree programme, the decision of
the Board of Management of the Institute shall be final.
2.4. At any time after admission, if found that a candidate has not fulfilled one or many of
the requirements stipulated by the Institute, or submitted forged certificates, the
Institute has the right to revoke the admission and forfeit the fee paid. In addition, legal
action may be taken against the candidate as decided by the Board of Management.
8
3.0 Student Discipline

Every student is required to observe utmost discipline and decorum both inside and
outside the campus and not to indulge in any activity which may affect adversely the
prestige reputation of the Institute.
3.1 Any act of indiscipline of a student reported to the Dean (Student affairs) and Head of the
Department will be referred to a Discipline Committee constituted for the purpose. The
Committee will enquire into the charges and decide on a suitable punishment if the charges
are substantiated. The committee will also authorize the Dean (Student Affairs) to
recommend to the Vice‐Chancellor for the implementation of the decision. The student
concerned may appeal to the Vice‐Chancellor, whose decision will be the final.
3.2 Ragging in any form is a criminal and non‐bailable offence in our country.
The current State and Central legislations provide stringent punishments including
imprisonment. Once the involvement of a student(s) is established in ragging, offending
fellow students/staff, harassment of any nature to the fellow students/staff etc. the
student(s) will be liable to be dismissed from the Institute, as per the laid down
procedures of the UGC / Govt. /Institute. Every senior student of the Institute, along
with their parent, shall give an undertaking every year in this regard and the same
should be submitted at the time of Registration.
4.0 Structure of the B. Tech Degree Programme
4.1 All B. Tech. degree Programmes will have the curriculum and syllabi (for 4 years) as
approved by the respective Board of Studies and Academic Council of the Institute.
4.2 Credits are the weightages, assigned to the courses based on the following general
pattern:
One Lecture / Tutorial period per week ‐‐‐ 1 credit
Up to Three periods of Practical per week ‐‐‐ 1 credit
4 periods of Practical per week ‐‐‐ 2 credits
4.3 The curriculum for B. Tech. programme is designed to have a minimum of 165 credits +
4 Non – CGPA credits that are distributed across eight semesters of study for the award
of degree.
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) was introduced from the Academic year 2015‐16 in
the curriculum to provide the students, a balanced approach to their educational
endeavour.
Under CBCS, the degree programme will consist of the following categories of courses:
i) General Core foundation (CF) courses comprising of
9
 Humanities courses;
 Basic Sciences (BS)including Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics;
 Engineering Sciences (ES), including Basic Engineering courses such as Material
Science, Basic Workshop, Engineering Drawing, Engineering Graphics, Digital
systems, etc.
ii) Compulsory Courses (CC) consist of the following.
a. Professional Core (PC) courses: These courses expose the students to the
foundation of Engineering topics related to the chosen programme of study
comprising of theory and Practical/ field work/ Design project/ Project.
b. Departmental Elective (DE): These courses enable the students to take up a group
of courses of their interest in the area of specialization offered by the parent
Department / School.
iii) Non –Departmental Electives (NE): These courses are offered by Engineering and
Non‐Engineering departments (across the disciplines) other than their parent
Department. Two groups of Electives are available under NE namely, Engineering
Electives, offered by the Engineering Departments and Open Electives, offered by
the Non – Engineering departments.
iv) Indexed Journal / Conference Publications: If a student publishes a research paper

as main author in indexed Journal / Conference, the same can be considered as
equivalent to two – credit course under NE.
v) Non-CGPA courses: These courses are offered in certain semesters are compulsory,
but are not used for calculation of GPA and CGPA. However, the credits will be
mentioned in the grade sheet.
4.4 Non – CGPA courses

The student shall select any two courses /activity listed in Table 1 during the course of study.
The student has to make his / her own efforts for earning the credits. The grades given will be
Pass / Fail (P/F). The respective class teachers have to encourage, monitor and record the
relevant activities of the students, based on the rules issued from time to time by the Institute
and submit the End semester report to the Head of the Department.
10
Table 1. Non – CGPA Courses

No. Course / Activity Credits
1. Start ups 2
2. Industrial Training 2
3. Technical conference, seminar, competitions, Professional 2
Societies
4. Management courses 2
5. Technical Certification Course 2
6. Sports 2
7. NCC 2
8. NSS 2
9. YRC 2
10. Art and Cultural activities 2
11. English Proficiency Certification 2
12. Aptitude Proficiency Certification 2
13. Foreign Languages Level II and above 2
14. Publication in Conferences / Seminar 2
4.5 A student must earn compulsorily, the credits mentioned under each category shown
in Table 2 and also a minimum total of 169 credits - 165 credits (CGPA) + 4 credits (Non
CGPA) for the award of B. Tech. degree. For Lateral entry students, the 41 credits
required for first and second semester of B. Tech shall be deemed to have been earned
based on their curriculum in the diploma course. They have to earn a minimum of 128
credits (124 credits + 4 Non CGPA credits) for the award of B. Tech. degree.
4.6 Students are eligible for award of B.Tech.(Hons) upon successful completion of 181
credits (165 regular credits + 12 Additional Credits+ 4 Non CGPA credits) maintaining
a CGPA of 8.0 during their period of study (4 years) and no history of arrears as detailed
in clause 7.0.
4.7 Students are eligible for the award of B.Tech. with Minor specialisation upon successful
completion of 12 additional credits totalling 181 credits (165 regular credits + 12
Additional Credits+ 4 Non – CGPA credits) as detailed in clause 8.0
11
Table 2. Distribution of Credits

No. Category Credits Percentage
1 Basic Sciences (BS) 32 20
2 Humanities Courses (HS) 7 4
3 Professional Core (PC) 90 53
4 Department Elective (DE) 15 9
5 Non – Department Electives (NE) 10 6
6 Design Project 3 2
7 Internship 1 0.5
8 Project 8 5
9 Comprehension 1 0.5
Total Credits 165 100
NON – CGPA
10 Professional Development 4 ‐‐‐
4.8 The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar
presentations and project reports.
5.0 Faculty Advisor

To help the students in planning their selection of courses and programme of study and
for getting general advice on the academic programme, the concerned department will
assign a certain number of students to a Faculty member who will be called their Faculty
Advisor. Such Faculty Advisor will continue to mentor the students assigned to him/her
for the entire duration of the programme.
5.1 Class Committee
5.2 Every section / batch of the B. Tech. Degree programme will have a Class Committee
consisting of Faculty and students.
5.3 The constitution of the Class Committee will be as follows:
a. One Professor not associated with teaching the particular class shall be nominated by
the Head of the Department to act as the Chairman of the Class Committee as approved
by the Dean Academics.
b. Course coordinator of each of the lecture – based courses (for common courses).
c. Class teacher of the class.
d. All Faculty handling the courses for that class in the semester.
12
e. Workshop Superintendent (for first two semesters); as applicable.

f. Four students from the respective class nominated by Head of the Department
g. Faculty Advisors of the respective class.
5.4 Course committee

A course committee shall be constituted by the HOD for all the common courses, with
the faculty who are teaching the courses and with a Professor of the core department
as the Chairman. The Course committee shall meet periodically to ensure the quality of
progression of the course in the semester.
5.5 The basic responsibilities of the Class Committee and Course committee are
a. To review periodically the progress of the students.
b. To discuss issues concerning curriculum and syllabi and the conduct of the classes.
c. To inform the students about the method of assessment as recommended by the
Department Exam Committee (“DEC”) at the beginning of the semester. Each class
committee / course committee will communicate its recommendations and the minutes
of the meetings to the Head of the Department, Dean (Academics) and the Dean
(Student Affairs).
d. To conduct meetings at least thrice in a semester as per the Academic Plan issued by
the Dean – Academics.
e. To review the academic performance of the students including attendance, internal
assessment and other issues like discipline, maintenance etc.
6.0 Registration for courses in a Semester
A student will be eligible for registration of courses only if he/she satisfies the regulation
clause 12.0 (progression), and clause 13.0 (maximum duration) and has cleared all dues
to the Institute, Hostel and Library up to the end of the previous semester provided that
student is not debarred from enrolment on disciplinary grounds.
6.1 The institute follows a flexible Choice Based Credit System and Slot based table.
Accordingly, the students shall be given the option for selecting their courses, credits,
teachers, slots and create their time table. The student is given the option of selecting
the number of credits to undergo in a semester, subject to the curriculum
requirements of minimum and maximum.
Except for the first year courses, registration for a semester will be done during a
specified week before the start of the semester as per the Academic Schedule.
13
Late registration /enrolment will be permitted by the Dean – Academics for genuine
cases, on recommendation by the Head of the respective department, with a late fee
as decided from time to time.
6.2 The student shall make the choice of course in consultation with the Faculty Advisor and
as stipulated from time to time.
6.3 Students shall have to pay additional fee as prescribed, for registering in certain elective
courses under Non ‐ Departmental Electives courses offered by certain specific
Departments and for higher level Foreign Languages, as decided from time to time.
7.0 B. Tech, (Honours) Programme

A new academic programme B.Tech. (Hons.) is introduced in order to facilitate the
students to choose additionally the specialized courses of their choice and build
their competence in a specialized area. The features of the new programme, include:
a. B.Tech. students in regular stream can opt for B.Tech. (Hons.), provided they have a
CGPA of 8.0 up to the end of fourth semester without any history of arrears.
b. The students opting for this program have to take four additional courses of their
specialization of a minimum of 3 credits each from 5th to 8th semesters with not more
than 2 additional courses in a semester.
c. The list of such additional courses offered by the various Departments of the respective
school will be announced in the beginning of the academic year to facilitate the
registration process.
d. The student can also opt for post graduate level courses
e. The faculty advisor will suggest the additional courses to be taken by the students based
on their choice and level of their academic competence.
f. Students who have obtained “E” or “U” or “RC” / “RA” grade or “DE” category (vide
clause 16.0 – Grading) in any course, including the additional credit courses, are not
eligible for B.Tech. (Hons) degree.
g. The students have to pay the requisite fee for the additional courses.
8.0 B. Tech with Minor specialization:

Students, who are desirous of pursuing their special interest areas other than the chosen
discipline of Engineering / Technology/ Arts/ Fashion/ Humanities/ Management/ Basic
Sciences, may opt for additional courses in minor specialisation groups offered by a
department other than their parent department. Such students shall select the stream of
courses offered with pre – requisites by the respective departments and earn a Minor
Specialization.
14
a. The number of credits to be earned for Minor specialization is 12 credits.

b. The students are permitted to register for their minor specialization courses from the
V semester onwards subject to a maximum of two additional courses per semester.
c. The list of such additional courses offered by the various departments and the schedule
will be announced in the beginning of the academic year to facilitate the registration
process.
d. The students have to pay the requisite fee for the additional courses.
9.0 Attendance
The faculty handling a course must finalise the attendance, 3 calendar days before the
last instructional day of the course and submit to the HoD through the class teacher.
a. A student with less than 75% attendance (Total Contact Hours ‐ “TCH”) in any course,
will not be permitted to appear for the end‐semester examination in that particular
course, irrespective of the reason for the shortfall of the attendance. The student is
however permitted to avail Academic Leave up to 10% for attending academic related
activities like, Industrial Visits, Seminars, Conferences, Competitions etc., with the prior
approval of the HoD. After the event, the student should submit the relevant documents
for proof to the HoD for approval of the Academic Leave.
b. The remaining 25% allowance in attendance is given to account for activities under NCC
/ NSS / Cultural / Sports/ Minor Medical exigencies etc.
c. A student with an attendance (“TCH” – Total Contact Hours) between 40% and 75% in
any course will fall under the category “RC”, which means Repeat the Course during the
Summer / Winter break. Students under “RC” category will not be permitted to attend
the Regular End Semester Examinations for that course. During the Summer / Winter
break, the regular courses of the respective semester will be offered as Summer/Winter
Courses, to enable the students to get required attendance and internal assessment
marks to appear in the Repeat examination.
d. Students under “RC” category in any course shall attend, the immediately following
Summer / Winter course as detailed in clause 11.1. The detailed schedule of the
Summer / Winter courses offered in every semester will be announced during the end
of that semester. The student who have obtained “RC” has to select their appropriate
slots and courses, optimally to attend the courses.
e. The student, whose attendance falls below 40% for a course in any semester, will be
categorized as “RA”, meaning detained in the particular course for want of attendance
and they will not be permitted to write the End semester exam for that course. The
procedure for repeating the course categorized as “RA” is mentioned in Clause 11.2.
15
9.1 Additional condonation may be considered in rare and genuine cases which includes,
approved leave for attending select NCC / Sports Camps, cases requiring prolonged
medical treatment and critical illness involving hospitalization.
For such select NCC / Sports Camps prior permission for leave shall be obtained by the
respective faculty coordinator / Director of sports from the designated authority, before
deputing the students.
9.2 For medical cases, submission of complete medical history and records with prior
information from the parent / guardian to Dean (Student Affairs) is mandatory. The
assessment of such cases will be done by the attendance sub – committee on the merit
of the case and put up recommendations to the Vice – Chancellor. Such condonation is
permitted only twice for a student in the entire duration of the programme.
The Vice‐Chancellor, based on the recommendation of the attendance sub ‐ committee
may then give condonation of attendance, only if the Vice‐Chancellor deems it fit and
deserving. But in any case, the condonation cannot exceed 10%.
10.0 Assessment Procedure

Every course shall have two components of assessment namely,
a. Continuous Internal Assessment “CIA”: This assessment will be carried out throughout the
semester as per the Academic Schedule.
b. End Semester Examination “ESE”: This assessment will be carried out at the end of the
Semester as per the Academic Schedule.
The weightages for the various categories of the courses for CIA and ESE is given in Table 3.
16
Table 3 Weightage of the CIA and ESE for various categories of the courses
Passing
CIA CIA ESE
No. Category of Courses ESE minimum
weightage Minimum Minimum
(CIA + ESE)
1 Theory Course 50% 40% 50% 50% 45%
2 Practical Course 80% 50% 20% 50% 50%
3 Theory Course with 60% 40% 40% 50% 45%
Practical Components
4 Department Elective 50% 40% 50% 50% 45%
(DE)/ Non –
Department Elective
(NE)
5 Design Project 100% 50% ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ 50%
6 Comprehension 100% 50% ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ 50%
7 Internship 100% 50% ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ 50%
8 Project and Viva Voce 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
10.1 Theory Course / DE / NE Assessment weightages

The general guidelines for the assessment of Theory Courses, Department Electives “DE”
and Non – Department Electives “NE” shall be done on a continuous basis is given in Table
4.
Table 4(a): Weightage for Assessment
No. Assessment Weightage Duration
Theory, DE, NE courses Theory, DE, NE
courses
1. First Periodical Assessment 5% 1 period
2. Second Periodical Assessment 10% 1 Period
3. CIA Third Periodical Assessment 10% 1Period
4. Seminar/Assignments/Project 15% ‐‐
5. Surprise Test / Quiz etc., 10% ‐‐
6. ESE End Semester Exam 50% 2 to 3 hours
17
10.2 Practical Course: For practical courses, the assessment will be done by the course teachers
as below:
Weekly assignment/Observation / lab records and viva as approved by the Department
Exam Committee “DEC”
a. Continuous Internal Assessment ‐‐ 80%
b. End Semester Examination ‐‐ 20%
10.3 Theory courses with practical Component: For theory courses with practical
component the assessment will be calculated as follows as approved by the “DEC”.
a. Continuous Internal Assessment ‐‐ 60%
b. End Semester Exam ‐‐ 40%
Table 4(b): Weightage for Assessment

Assessment Weightage
No. Theory, DE, NE courses Theory, DE, NE Duration
courses
1. First Periodical Assessment 10% 1 period
2. Second Periodical Assessment 10% 1 Period
3. CIA Third Periodical Assessment 10% 1Period
4. Practical Assessment 30% ‐‐‐‐
5. ESE End Semester Exam 40% 2 to 3 hours
10.4 Design Project – Assessment

The general guidelines for assessment of Design Project is given in Table 5.
Table 5: Assessment pattern for Design Project
No. Review / Examination scheme Broad Guidelines Weightage
1. First Review Concept 20%
2. Second Review Design 30%
3. Third Review Experiment/Analysis 20%
4. Project report Results and Conclusion 30%
and Viva – Voce
10.5 Comprehension – Assessment

The general guidelines for assessment of Comprehension is given in Table 6.
18
Table 6: Assessment pattern for Comprehension

No. Review / Examination scheme Broad Guidelines Weightage
1. First Periodical Assessment – MCQ Basic Sciences 20%
2. Second Periodical Assessment – Core Engineering 50%
MCQ
3. Third Periodical Assessment – Emerging Areas 30%
Presentation
10.6 Internship
A student has to compulsorily attend Summer / Winter internship during 3rd year for a
minimum period of one month.
In lieu of Summer / Winter internship, the student is permitted to register for
undertaking case study / project work under an engineering faculty of the Institute and
carry out the project for minimum period of one month.
In both the cases, the internship report in the prescribed format duly certified by the
faculty in‐charge shall be submitted to the HoD. The evaluation will be done through
presentation and viva. The course will have a weightage of one credit or as defined in
the respective curriculum.
10.7 For final year Project / Dissertation / Design Project/ Internship, the assessment will be
done on a continuous basis as given in Table 7
Table 7: Assessment of Project work
No. Review / Examination scheme Weightage
1. First Review 10%
2. Second Review 20%
3. Third Review 20%
4. Project report and Viva – Voce 50%
For the final year project and Viva – Voce end semester examination, the student shall submit
a Project Report in the prescribed format issued by the Institute. The first three reviews will be
conducted by a Committee constituted by the Head of the Department. The end – semester
assessment will be based on the project report and a viva on the project conducted by a
Committee constituted by the Registrar / Controller of examination. This may include an external
expert.
10.8 For Non – CGPA courses, the assessment will be graded “Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory” and
grades as Pass/Fail will be awarded.
10.9 Flexibility in Assessment
The respective Departments under the approval of the Department Exam Committee
(DEC) may decide the mode of assessment, based on the course requirements.
19
10.10 A student securing less than the minimum specified internal assessment marks in any
course (clause 10.0, Table 3), will not be permitted to appear for the end‐semester
examination in that particular course and will be graded under “RC” category for that
course. This will be denoted in the grade sheet as “RC”, till the course is
successfully completed in the subsequent semester(s).
11.0 Procedures for Course Repetition / Repeat Examinations

11.1 Summer / Winter Course: - for “RC” Category
a. Students under RC category i.e.
i. Attendance between 40% and 75% in any course(s) OR
ii. CIA marks less than the prescribed minimum as specified in 10.0 Table 3 in
any course(s) OR
iii. Falls under both 1 and 2 above
are eligible for registering for the Summer / Winter Course which will be conducted
during the Summer / Winter break, to improve their Attendance and/or CIA marks in
the courses, by paying the prescribed registration fee fixed from time to time..
b. The Odd semester regular courses will be offered only in the Winter and the even
semester regular courses will be offered only in the Summer.
c. RC students shall register by payment of prescribed fee and attend the classes during
the summer / winter break and take assessments to earn minimum internal marks
(clause 10.0, Table 3) and/or required attendance, to become eligible for writing the
Repeat Examinations (Clause 11.3).
d. The revised CIA marks shall not exceed 60% of the total internal weightage for any
repeat course.
e. Re- Registration for ‘RC’ category
The students under “RC” category who fail to improve their attendance and/or CIA
marks and not become eligible to write the Repeat Examination through the
immediate summer/winter course are permitted to re – register for the Summer /
Winter course again under “RC” category whenever it is offered in the subsequent
semester(s) during their period of study by paying 50% of the prescribed registration
fee as mentioned in Clause 11.1 (a). It is the responsibility of the student to fix the
appropriate slots in the Summer / Winter course time table. The student will not be
able to register if he/she is unable to fix the slots in the time table. The course will
remain in the “RC” category until he / she successfully completes that course.
11.2 Course – Repetition - “RA” Category
20
a. Students who secure attendance less than 40% in any course(s) in a semester will be
categorized under “RA” ‐ meaning Repeat the course(s) for want of minimum
attendance. The CIA marks obtained by the students placed under RA category will
become null and void.
b. “RA” category students shall re‐register for the same course once again whenever it
is offered in the subsequent regular semesters and has to secure required minimum
attendance and minimum internal assessment marks to become eligible to appear
in the end semester examination for that course, by paying the requisite fee.
c. It is the responsibility of the student to schedule their time table to include the “RA”
courses without affecting the attendance of the regular courses of the current
semester.
d. Normally, a student will be permitted to register for not more than 3 “RA” courses
in a semester. However, the students who wish to register for more than 3 “RA”
courses are permitted to register only if the student finds suitable slots for doing the
course within the framework of the time table for the regular semester. Request for
registrations of additional RA courses over and above 3 in a semester shall be got
approved by the respective HoDs.
e. The student has the option to drop their regular courses proportionally in their
regular semester during the course registration process without affecting the
minimum credit requirement specified. Such dropped courses will be categorized as
“RA”. However, the student has to complete the dropped courses in the subsequent
semesters.
f. It is the responsibility of the student to fix the slots for “RA” courses within the
framework of the time table and slot availability without affecting his/her regular
courses.
g. Detention
A student who secure RC or RA or both in all the theory courses prescribed in a
semester shall repeat the semester by registering for the semester in the next
academic year. However, he/she is permitted to appear for arrear examination as
per eligibility.
11.3 Repeat Examinations
a. Normally, the results of the End Semester Examinations for Regular Theory courses are
announced within a period of 10 days after the last regular examination.
b. During the even semester, the Repeat Examinations will be conducted for even
semester courses and during the Odd semester the Repeat Examinations will be
conducted for Odd semester courses.
c. The schedule for the Repeat Examinations will be notified through the Academic
Calendar which will be published at the beginning of every academic year.
21
d. The students under “RC” category, who have secured the requisite attendance and
internal assessment marks as applicable, by successfully completing the Summer /
Winter course, are eligible to register for the Repeat Examinations.
e. The students who fail to secure a pass or being absent for genuine reasons in their End
Semester Examination for the regular courses are permitted to appear for the Repeat
Exams by paying the prescribed fee.
f. For the Supplementary examinations (refer: Clause 15.2), the students with “U” grade
in any course (refer clause 10.0 Table 3 and Clause 16.1) shall register by paying
requisite fee and appear in the Repeat Examinations.
g. The students who wish to apply for the revaluation of their answer scripts (Regular/
Supplementary / Repeat Examinations) should apply immediately after the
announcement of results.
12.0 Progression to higher semester

12.1 B.Tech.– Regular: Student has to satisfy the following conditions as laid down in Table
8 for progression from one academic year to next.
Table 8. Minimum Eligibility for progression B.Tech.- Regular
To enroll for semester Minimum no. of credits to be earned for progression
3 NIL
st nd rd
5 15 credits* in Theory courses in 1 , 2 and 3
Semesters
th
7 30 credits* in Theory courses up to 5 Semester
* Credit calculation is applicable for Theory / Theory integrated lab only
If a student fails to satisfy the above clause 12.1 in an academic year, the student has
to take a break in study until they become eligible for progression
12.2 B.Tech.- Lateral Entry

Student has to satisfy the following conditions as laid down in Table 9 for progression
from one academic year to next.
Table 9. Minimum Eligibility for progression B.Tech.- Lateral Entry
To enroll for semester Minimum no. of credits to be earned
5 NIL
15 credits* in Theory courses in 3rd, 4th
7
and 5th Semesters
*Credit calculation is applicable for Theory / Theory integrated lab only
22
If a student fails to satisfy the above clause 12.2 in an academic year, the student has to take
a break in study until they become eligible for progression
12.3 If a student is in RC category (due to lack of minimum CIA marks as specified in clause
no. 10. Table 3) or RA category (due to lack of minimum attendance as specified in
clause 9.0 e) in all theory courses prescribed in a semester, he/she will be detained and
will not be allowed to proceed to the next semester. He/she has to re‐register for all the
courses in the following academic year only.
13.0 Maximum Duration of the Programme

A student may complete the programme at a slower pace than the regular
pace, but in any case in not more than 6 years for B. Tech, and not more than 5 years
for lateral entry students excluding the semesters withdrawn as per clause 14.0.
A student completing the B.Tech. programme during the extended period will not be
eligible for Institute ranking.
14.0 Temporary Withdrawal from the Programme

a. A student is permitted to take a break, up to a maximum of 2 semesters, during the entire
programme to clear the backlog of arrears.
b. A student may be permitted by the Vice‐ Chancellor to withdraw from the entire
programme for a maximum of two semesters for reasons of ill health, Start – up
venture or other valid reasons as recommended by a committee consisting of Head of
Department, Dean (Academic) and Dean (Student Affairs).
15.0 Declaration of results

15.1 A student shall secure the minimum marks as prescribed in Clause 10.1(Table 3) in all
categories of courses in all the semesters to secure a pass in that course.
15.2 Supplementary Examinations: If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a course and gets
a “U” grade as per clause 16.1 he/she shall register and pay the requisite fee for re‐
appearing in the End Semester Examination during the following semester(s). Such
examinations are called Supplementary Examinations and will be conducted along with
the Regular /Repeat Examinations. The Supplementary Exams for the Odd semester
courses will be conducted during the odd semester and supplementary exams for the
even semester courses will be conducted during the even semester only. The student
need not attend any contact course. The Internal Assessment marks secured by the
candidate will be retained for all such attempts.
23
15.3 A candidate can apply for the revaluation of his/her end semester examination answer
script in a theory course, after the declaration of the results, on payment of a prescribed
fee.
15.4 If a candidate fails to secure a pass in Practical/Theory with Practical component / Design
Project / Internship / Comprehension courses, due to not satisfying the minimum passing
requirement (“U” grade) – as per clause 16.1 he/she shall register for the courses by
paying the prescribed fee in the subsequent semester when offered by the
departments.
15.5 Revaluation is not permitted for Practical/Theory with Practical component/Design
Project / Internship / Comprehension courses. However, only for genuine grievances as
decided by the Exam Grievance Committee a student may be permitted to apply for
revaluation.
15.6 After 5 years, i.e., completion of one year (2 semesters) from the normal duration of
the programme, the internal assessment marks obtained by the candidate will not be
considered in calculating the passing requirement. A candidate who secures 50% in the
end semester examination will be declared to have passed the course and earned the
specified credits for the course irrespective of the score in internal assessment marks
earned in that course.
15.7 Candidate who earns required credits for the award of degree after 5 years for B.Tech.
programme (on expiry of extended period of 2 semesters over and above normal duration
of course) he/she will be awarded only second class irrespective of his/her CGPA. However,
the period approved under temporary withdrawal, if any, from the programme (13.0) will be
excluded from the maximum duration as mentioned above.
15.8 Semester Abroad Programme: Students who are allowed to undergo internship or
Training in Industries in India or abroad during their course work or attend any
National / International Institute under semester abroad programme (SAP) up to a
maximum of 2 semesters will be granted credit transfer for the Course Work/project work
done by them in the Industry /Foreign Institute as per the recommendations of the credit
transfer committee. The leave period of the students for International internships / Semester
Abroad programme etc., will be accounted for attendance.
24
16.0 Grading
16.1 A grading system as shown in Table 10 will be followed.
Table 10: Grading system

Range of Letter Grade
Remarks
Marks Grade Points
90 – 100 S 10 Outstanding
80‐89 A 09 Excellent
70‐79 B 08 Very Good
60‐69 C 07 Good
50‐59 D 06 Average
45 – 49 E 05 Pass
<45 U 00 To Reappear for end‐semester examination
Repeat Course (Summer / Winter) due to

Attendance deficiency ( between 40% and
75%)
‐‐ RC 00
and/or
I. Lack of minimum CIA marks as specified in
clause 10.0 Table 3
‐‐ RA 00 Repeat the course due to
(i) Lack of minimum attendance (below 40%) in
regular course
‐‐ 00 DETAINED
“RC” or “RA” or both in all registered theory
courses of a semester. The student is detained
and has to repeat the entire semester. Clause
12.3
16.2 GPA and CGPA

GPA is the ratio of the sum of the product of the number of credits Ci of course “i “and
the grade points Pi earned for that course taken over all courses “i” registered and
successfully completed by the student to the sum of Ci for all “i”. That is,
25
 C i Pi
GPA  i
 Ci
i
CGPA will be calculated in a similar manner, in any semester, considering all the courses
enrolled from the first semester onwards.
16.3 The Grade card will not include the computation of GPA and CGPA for courses with letter
grade RA, RC and U until those grades are converted to the regular grades.
16.4 A course successfully completed cannot be repeated.
17.0 Grade Sheet

17.1 Letter grade
Based on the performance, each student is awarded a final letter grade at the end of
the semester in each course. The letter grades and corresponding grade points are given
in Table 10.
17.2 A student is considered to have completed a course successfully and earned credits if he/she
secures a letter grade other than U, RC, RA in that course.
17.3 After results are declared, grade sheet will be issued to each student which will contain the
following details:
a. Program and discipline for which the student has enrolled.
b. Semester of registration.
c. The course code, name of the course, category of course and the credits for each course
registered in that semester
d. The letter grade obtained in each course
e. Semester Grade Point Average (GPA)
f. The total number of credits earned by the student up to the end of that semester in each
of the course categories.
g. The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of all the courses taken from the first
semester.
h. Credits earned under Non CGPA courses.
i. Additional credits earned for B. Tech (Hons.) and B. Tech with Minor specialization.
18.0 Class/Division
18.1 Classification is based on CGPA and is as follows:

CGPA ≥ 8.0: First Class with distinction
6.5 ≤ CGPA <8.0: First Class
5.0 ≤ CGPA <6.5: Second Class.
26
18.2 (i) Further, the award of ‘First class with distinction’ is subject to the candidate
becoming eligible for the award of the degree having passed the examination in all
the courses in his/her first appearance with effect from II semester, within the
minimum duration of the programme.
(ii) The award of ‘First Class’ is further subject to the candidate becoming eligible for the
award of the degree having passed the examination in all the courses within 5 years
for B. Tech programmes
(iii) The period of authorized break of the programme (vide clause 14.0) will not be
counted for the purpose of the above classification.
(iv) To be eligible for award of B. Tech (Hons.) the student must have earned additional
12 credits in the relevant Engineering courses offered by the Departments of the
respective Schools, thereby a total of 181 credits (165 regular credits + 12 additional
credits + 4 Non CGPA credits) and should have 8.0 CGPA without any history of
arrears and should not have secured E, RC, RA, U, in any course during the entire
programme.
(v) To be eligible for award of B. Tech with Minor Specialization, the student must have
earned additional 12 credits in the relevant courses offered by other than the parent
department and has successfully earned 181 credits (165 regular credits + 12
Additional credits + 4 Non CGPA Credits)
19.0 Transfer of credits
19.1. Within the broad framework of these regulations, the Academic Council, based on the
recommendation of the Credit Transfer Committee so constituted may permit students to
transfer part of the credit earned in other approved Universities of repute & status in the
India or abroad.
19.2 The Academic Council may also approve admission of students who have completed a
portion of course work in another approved Institute of repute under lateral entry based on
the recommendation of the credit transfer committee on a case to case basis.
19.3 Admission norms for working Professional:
Separate admission guidelines are available for working / experienced professionals for
candidates with the industrial / research experience who desire to upgrade their qualification
as per recommendation of Credit Transfer Committee.
20.0 Eligibility for Award of the B.Tech. /B. Tech (Hons)/ B. Tech with Minor Specialization
Degree
20.1 A student shall be declared to be eligible for award of B. Tech. /B. Tech (Hons) / B. Tech
degree with Minor specialization if he/she has satisfied the clauses 4.6 /7.0 / 8.0
respectively within the stipulated time (clause 13, 14).
27
a. Earned the specified credits in all the categories of courses (vide clause 4.6) as specified
in the curriculum corresponding to the discipline of his/ her study ;
b. No dues to the Institute, Hostels, Libraries etc.; and
c. No disciplinary action is pending against him / her.
The award of the degree shall be recommended by the Academic Council and approved by the
Board of Management of the Institute.
21.0 Change of Discipline
21.1 If the number of students in any discipline of B.Tech. programme as on the last instructional
day of the First Semester is less than the sanctioned strength, then the vacancies in the said
disciplines can be filled by transferring students from other disciplines subject to eligibility.
All such transfers will be allowed on the basis of merit of the students. The decision of the
Vice‐Chancellor shall be final while considering such requests.
21.2 All students who have successfully completed the first semester of the course will be eligible
for consideration for change of discipline subject to the availability of vacancies and as per
norms.
22.0 Power to modify

Notwithstanding all that has been stated above, the Academic Council is vested with powers
to modify any or all of the above regulations from time to time, if required, subject to the
approval by the Board of Management.
28
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

(165 CREDIT STRUCTURE)
SEMESTER – I
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
Professional English and Soft Skills
ELA4101/
1 HS/ES /Engineering Graphics and Computer 1 1 2 3 1 4
MEA4101
Aided Design
2 BS MAA4101 Matrices and Calculus 3 0 2 4 0 5
PHA4102/ Engineering Physics/Engineering
3 BS 3 0 0 3 1 3
CYA4101 Materials
4 PC CSA4101 Problem Solving Using C 2 0 2 3 1 4
EEB4101 Introduction to Digital Systems /
5 ES 3 0 0 3 1 3
/CSB4101 Engineering and Design
7 ES CSB4131 Engineering Immersion Lab 0 0 2 0.5 2 2
PHA4131/C Engineering Physics Laboratory/
8 BS 0 0 2 1 0 2
YA4131 Materials Chemistry Laboratory
Total 12 1 10 17.5 6 23
SEMESTER – II
SL. COURSE COURSE
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4117 Analytical Mathematics 3 0 2 4 0 5
PHA4102/ Engineering Physics/ Engineering
2 BS 3 0 0 3 1 3
CYA4101 Materials
Professional English and Soft Skills
ELA4101/
3 HS/ES /Engineering Graphics and Computer 1 1 2 3 1 4
MEA4101
Aided Design
EEB4101 / Introduction to Digital Systems /
4 ES 2 0 2 3 1 4
CSB4101 Engineering and Design
5 PC GEA4102 Sustainable Engineering Systems 2 0 0 2 1 3
6 PC CSB4117 Data Structures using C 3 0 0 3 1 3
Object Oriented Programming using
7 PC CSB4118 3 0 2 4 1 5
C++
8 PC CSB4146 Data Structures Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 ES CSB4131 Engineering Immersion Lab 0 0 2 0.5 2 2
PHA4131/ Engineering Physics Laboratory/
10 BS 0 0 2 1 0 2
CYA4131 Materials Chemistry Laboratory
Total 17 1 15 24.5 8 34
29
SEMESTER – III
SL. COURSE COURSE
NO CATEGORY CODE
Partial Differential Equations and
1 BS MAA4201 3 1 0 4 0 5
Transforms
2 PC CSB4201 Design and Analysis of Algorithms 2 1 2 4 1 5
3 PC CSB4202 Database Management Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 PC CSB4203 Java Programming 3 0 2 4 0 5
5 DE CSC42** Department Elective‐I 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 NE CSD42** Non‐Department Elective‐ I 2 0 0 2 0 2
7 PC CSB4231 Python Programming Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC CSB4232 Database Management Systems Lab 0 0 3 1 0 2
Total 16 2 10 22 2 28
SEMESTER – IV
SL. COURSE COURSE

NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4219 Discrete Mathematics 3 1 0 4 0 4

Computer Organization and
2
PC CSB4216 Architecture 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 PC CSB4217 Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 PC CSB4218 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 DE CSC42** Department Elective‐II 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 NE CSD42** Non‐Department Elective–II 2 0 0 2 0 2
7 PC CSB4241 Networking Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC CSB4242 Operating Systems Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC CSB4243 Design Project‐I 0 0 2 1 0 2
10 ‐ ‐ Internship 0 0 0 1 0 0
Total 16 1 10 22 3 27
30
SEMESTER - V
SL. COURSE COURSE
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4302 Probability and Statistics 3 1 0 4 0 5
2 PC CSB4301 Web Technology 2 0 2 3 1 4
3 PC CSB4302 Theory of Computation 3 1 0 4 1 4
4 PC CSB4303 Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3 0 3
5 HS GEA4216 Professional Ethics and Life Skills 2 0 0 2 1 2
6 DE CSC43** Department Elective‐III 3 0 0 3 0 3
7 NE CSD43** Non‐Department Elective–III 2 0 0 2 0 2
8 PC CSB4331 Skill Development in Programming 0 0 2 1 0 2
9 PC CSB4332 Design Project with IoT 0 0 3 1 0 3
Total 18 0 7 23 3 28
SEMESTER – VI
SL. COURSE COURSE

NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC CSB4316 Principles of Compiler Design 3 0 0 3 1 3

2 PC CSB4317 Machine Learning 3 0 2 4 1 5
3 PC CSB4318 Data Warehousing and Data Mining 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 PC CSB4319 Modern Software Engineering 3 0 2 4 1 5
5 BS GEA4304 Business Economics 2 0 0 2 1 2
6 DE CSC43** Department Elective‐IV 3 0 0 3 0 3
7 NE CSD43** Non‐Department Elective–IV 2 0 0 2 0 2
8 PC CSB4341 Compiler Design lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC CSB4342 Design Project‐II 0 0 2 1 0 2
10 ‐ ‐ Internship 0 0 0 1 0 0
Total 19 0 9 25 5 28
31
SEMESTER – VII
SL. COURSE COURSE
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC CSB4401 Software Project Management 3 0 0 3 1 3
2 PC CSB4402 Big Data and Analytics 3 0 2 4 1 5
Applied Cryptography and Network
3 PC CSB4403 3 1 0 4 1 4
Security
4 PC CSB4404 Programming Paradigms 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 NE CSC44** Department Elective–V 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 DE CSD44** Non‐Department Elective‐V 2 0 0 2 0 2
7 PC CSB4431 Cloud Deployment Lab 2 0 2 3 0 5
8 PC CSB4432 Design Project‐III 0 0 2 1 0 2
Total 19 1 6 23 4 27
SEMESTER – VIII
SL. COURSE COURSE
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC CSB4441 Project & Viva – voce 0 0 16 8 0 16
Total 0 0 16 8 0 16
Total 165
32
LIST OF DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES WITH GROUPING - SEMESTER WISE

COURSE COURSE
SEM NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
CATEGORY CODE
3 DE CSC4251 System Software 3 0 0 3 0 3
3 DE CSC4252 Computer Graphics and Multimedia 3 0 0 3 0 3
3 DE CSC4253 IT Infrastructure and Management 3 0 0 3 0 3
3 DE CSC4254 Introduction to Open Source Standards 3 0 0 3 0 3
3 DE CSC4255 Information Architecture 3 0 0 3 0 3
3 DE CSC4256 ERP and Enterprise Domains 3 0 0 3 0 3
4 DE CSC4266 Mobile Application Development 2 0 2 3 0 3
4 DE CSC4268 .Net Framework and Programming 2 0 2 3 0 3
4 DE CSC4269 LINUX Internals 2 0 2 3 0 3
4 DE CSC4270 Agile Software Development 2 0 2 3 0 3
Advanced Java Programming with
4 DE CSC4271 2 0 2 3 0 3
Frameworks
4 DE CSC4272 Middleware Technologies 2 0 2 3 0 3
5 DE CSC4351 Database Security 3 0 0 3 0 3
5 DE CSC4352 Multicore Architecture 3 0 0 3 0 3
5 DE CSC4353 Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 0 3
5 DE CSC4354 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 0 3
5 DE CSC4355 Software and Application Security 3 0 0 3 0 3
Distributed Database Management
5 DE CSC4356 3 0 0 3 0 3
Systems
6 DE CSC4366 Software Testing 3 0 0 3 0 3

6 DE CSC4367 Cyber Physical Systems 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 DE CSC4368 Scripting Languages 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 DE CSC4369 Parallel Programming 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 DE CSC4370 Cyber forensics and Laws 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 DE CSC4371 Service Oriented Architecture 3 0 0 3 0 3
6 DE CSC4372 Object Oriented System Design 3 0 0 3 0 3
7 DE CSC4451 Deep Learning 2 0 2 3 0 4
7 DE CSC4452 High performance Computing 3 0 0 3 0 3
7 DE CSC4453 Computer Vision 3 0 0 3 0 3
Security Governance Risk and
7 DE CSC4455 3 0 0 3 0 3
Compliance
7 DE CSC4456 Software Quality Management 3 0 0 3 0 3
7 DE CSC4457 Software Design and System Integration 3 0 0 3 0 3
7 DE CSC4458 Mobile Technology 3 0 0 3 0 3
33
LIST OF NON DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES OFFERED BY AUTOMOBILE DEPARTMENT WITH

GROUPING - SEMESTER WISE
SEM COURSE COURSE NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
CATEGORY CODE
Basics of Object Oriented
3
NE CSD4281 Programming 2 0 0 2 0 2
3 NE CSD4282 Basics of Java programming 2 0 0 2 0 2
3 NE CSD4283 Web Development 2 0 0 2 0 2
4 NE CSD4291 XML and Web Services 2 0 0 2 0 2

4 NE CSD4292 Android Application Development 2 0 0 2 0 2
4 NE CSD4293 Internet of Things 2 0 0 2 0 2
Digital Image Processing using

5
NE CSD4381 MATLAB 2 0 0 2 0 2
5 NE CSD4382 Mainframe Technologies 2 0 0 2 0 2
5 NE CSD4383 Building Enterprise Applications 2 0 0 2 0 2
6 NE CSD4391 Adhoc and Sensor Networks 2 0 0 2 0 2

6 NE CSD4392 Cyber security & forensics 2 0 0 2 0 2
6 NE CSD4393 Cloud Computing 2 0 0 2 0 2
7 NE CSD4481 Big Data Analytics 2 0 0 2 0 2

7 NE CSD4482 Agile Software Development 2 0 0 2 0 2
7 NE CSD4483 Business Intelligence and applications 2 0 0 2 0 2
34
SEMESTER – I
COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH AND SOFT SKILLS CREDITS 3
COURSE CODE ELA4101 COURSE CATEGORY HS L-T-P-S 1- 1- 2- 1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
Understand the importance of professional communication and applying the 8,9,10
1.
knowledge.
Integrate the knowledge of phonetics, enhancing the listening skills in formal and real‐ 8,9,10
2.
life situations, enhance pronunciation skills based on the knowledge of phonetics.
Construct appropriate sentences in English Language, applying grammatical rules and 8,9,10
3. mastery in syntax. Develop reading skills and derive the contextual meaning, case
studies and analyzing problems.
Integrate creativity in the writing skills both in formal and informal situations, related 8,9,10
4.
to environment, society and multidisciplinary environments.
5. Imbibe soft skills to excel in interpersonal skills essential for workplace. 8,9,10
Prerequisites : Plus Two English‐Intermediate Level
MODULE 1 – THE ELEMENTS OF COMMUNICATION (9)
Importance of communication through English ‐Process of communication and factors that influence
speaking‐ Importance of audience and purpose‐ Principles of Communication‐comparing general
communication and business Communication‐Professional Communication‐barriers to communication –
strategies to overcome communication barriers‐formal and informal communication
Suggested Activities:
Self‐introduction‐short Conversations‐Situational communication‐dialogue writing ‐Language Functions‐
analyse the speech and comment‐distinguish formal and informal style of communication‐using bias‐
free language‐ news reports.
Suggested Reading:
 Rogerson, Trish Stott & Derek Utley.2011
 Elements of Effective Communication: 4th Edition, Plain and Precious Publishing, USA, by Randal
S. Chase (Author), Wayne Shamo (Author)
 Effective Communication Skills, MTD Training & Ventus Publishing (e book)
MODULE 2 – AURAL –ORAL COMMUNICATION IN ENGLISH (9)
Vowels‐ diphthongs‐ consonants ‐ International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) ; phonemic transcription (simple
words)‐syllable division and word stress –enunciation‐GIE script(General Indian English)‐ neutral accent‐
sentence rhythm and weak forms ‐ contrastive stress in sentences to highlight different words ‐
intonation varieties of Spoken English : Standard Indian, American and British‐Speaking to Communicate‐
speech acts ‐ Language Patterns
35
(Note: This unit should be taught in a simple, non-technical manner, avoiding technical terms as far
as possible).
Suggested activities: (Audio CD) Listen and repeat, listen to the sentences and fill in the blanks, Listening
to passages and answering questions, marking the stressed syllable, phonemic script of simple words,
sentence rhythm and intonation (rising tone and falling tone), short speeches. Individual presentations‐
dynamics of a group discussion
Suggested sources:
Cambridge IELTS, Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Press, Face to face series
Cambridge University Press, Speaking Effectively, Cambridge University Press, Jeremy Comfort, Pamela.
MODULE 3 - GRAMMAR AND DEVELOPMENT OF READING SKILLS (9)
Noun Phrase, Verb Phrase, Tense and Aspect, Articles, Pronouns and determiners, Sentence Pattern,
interrogative and negative sentences‐subject verb agreement ‐Vocabulary‐word formation: prefixes and
suffixes, reading passages‐inductive vs deductive reading‐newspaper articles‐ comprehension passages
–cloze reading‐annotating‐editing
Identify the errors in sentences, grammar exercises, book reviews, mini project on suggested reading
activity ‐ reading technical passages based on student’s area of specialization answering questions‐
reading passage for identifying the contextual meaning
Suggested sources:
Skills for the TOEFL IBT Test, Collins IELTS, Cambridge books Practical English Usage by Michael Swan,
Cambridge University Press
MODULE 4 - EFFECTIVE WRITING AND BUSINESS COMMUNICATION (9)
Paragraph writing‐ topic sentence‐connectives ‐ process writing‐Memoranda‐Business letters‐Resumes
/Visumes and job applications‐drafting a report‐agenda and minutes of the meeting‐ATR‐project
proposals‐email etiquette‐ interpreting visual data (bar chart, pie chart, line graphs).
Suggested activities:
Writing short paragraph based on environment protection, societal issues, health, cultural contexts etc.,
identifying topic sentences, linking pairs of sentences, cause and effect exercises, formal letters, e mails,
drafting project proposals, drafting agenda, minutes of the meeting
Suggested sources:
Cambridge Advanced English, Newspapers, library books, IELTS, IELTS Academic Writing 1, New Insights
into IELTS, CUP.
MODULE 5 – SOFT SKILLS (9)
Introducing Soft Skills &Life Skills‐ Myers Briggs Type Indicator – the Big Five Model Personality ‐
Employability Skills‐ Workplace Etiquette‐ Professional Ethics ‐Time Management‐Stress Management‐
Lateral Thinking (De Bono’s Six Thinking Hats) and Problem Solving Skills
Mock interviews, GD’s, short oral presentation, lateral thinking puzzles, Case analysis and self‐study
assignments, Worksheet activities.
36
Suggested Sources:
Soft Skills and Employability Skills by Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez, Cambridge University Press, 2018.
Soft Skills for Everyone by Jeff Butterfield, Cengage Learning Education and personality development, K.
Manoharan English for Life and the Workplace through the LSRW&T skills, Lateral Thinking skills by
Edward De Bono.
TEXT BOOKS
1. An Introduction to Profession English and Soft Skills with audio CD by Dr. Bikram K. Das et al.
Published by Cambridge University Press, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez,"Soft Skills & Employability Skills",Cambridge University Press
2018.
2. Steve Hart et al."Embark, English for Undergraduates", Cambridge University Press, 2016
3. Skills for the TOEFL IBT Test, Collins, 2012 edition
4. Jeff Butterfield "Soft Skills for Everyone", Cengage Learning, 2010 edition
5. Dolly John,"English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T skills" Pearson Publications, 2014.
6. Aruna Koneru,"Professional Speaking Skills",Oxford Publications, 2015
The official Cambridge guide to IELTS for Academic and General Training, Cambridge University
7.
Press, 2014 edition.
8. Cambridge BEC Vantage, Self‐Study edition, Practice Tests, CUP, 2002
9. English for Business Studies, 3rd edition, Ian Mackenzie, Cambridge University Press
10. Education and Personality Development by Dr. P.K.Manoharan, APH Publishing Corporation, 2015
11. Speaking Effectively by Jeremy Comfort et al, Cambridge University Press, 2011.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.britishcouncil.in/english/courses‐business
2. http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/features/pronunciation
3. http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/
4. http://www.antimoon.com/how/pronunc‐soundsipa.htm
5. http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/write‐and‐improve/
6. Oneshopenglish.com
7. Breakingnews.com
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/english
2. https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/adventures‐writing‐stanford‐online
3. http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/mooc/
37
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND COMPUTER AIDED

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
DESIGN
COURSE CODE MEA4101 COURSE CATEGORY ES L-T-P-S 1 -1- 2 -1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
Understand drafting and computer aided drafting. Remember the commands used 1,2,5
1.
in AutoCAD to generate simple drawings.
Explain details in a drawing and apply the knowledge to solve simple problems 1,2,5
2.
involving straight lines, planes and solids.
Understand and Visualize solid objects and apply AutoCAD software commands to 1,2,5
3.
generate the graphic models.
4. Apply the 3D model commands to generate and solid object. 1,2,5
Apply the viewing AutoCAD commands to generate top view, front view and 1,2,5
5.
additional or sectional views.
Develop any graphical model of geometrical and simple mechanical objects in 1,2,3,5
6.
AutoCAD software.
Prerequisites: Nil
MODULE 1: BASICS OF ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND PLANE CURVES (12L)
Importance of graphics ‐ BIS conventions and specifications ‐ drawing sheet sizes ‐ Lettering –
Dimensioning ‐ Scales. Drafting methods ‐ introduction to Computer Aided Drafting – Computer
Hardware – Workstation – Printer and Plotter – Introduction to software for Computer Aided Design
and Drafting – Exposure to Solid Modelling software – Geometrical Construction‐Coordinate
Systems/Basic Entities – 3D printer.
Self-Study: Solid modelling Software commands
MODULE 2: VISUALIZATION, ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND FREE HAND SKETCHING (15L)
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of Three‐
Dimensional objects — Pictorial Projection methods ‐ Layout of views‐ Free hand sketching of multiple
views from pictorial views of objects. Drafting of simple Geometric Objects/Editing.
General principles of presentation of technical drawings as per BIS ‐ Introduction to Orthographic
projections ‐ Naming views as per BIS ‐ First angle projection method. Conversion to orthographic
views from given pictorial views of objects, including dimensioning – Drafting of Orthographic views
from Pictorial views.
Self-study: CAD software commands for sketching a drawing
MODULE 3: GEOMETRICAL MODELING ISOMETRIC VIEWS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES (15L)
Principles of isometric projection and solid modelling. Isometric drawing ‐ IsoPlanes and 3D Modelling
commands. Projections of Principal Views from 3‐D Models. Solid Modeling – Types of modelling ‐
38
Wire frame model, Surface Model and Solid Model – Introduction to graphic software for solid
modelling. Development of Surfaces.
Self-study: Surface modelling and solid modelling commands
MODULE 4: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING (15L)
Preparation of solid models of machine components like slide block, solid bearing block, bushed
bearing, gland, wall bracket, guide bracket, shaft bracket, jig plate, shaft support (open type), vertical
shaft support etc using appropriate modelling software.
2D views and sectional view, computer aided drafting and dimensioning. Generate 2D drawing from
the 3D models – generate and develop the lateral surfaces of the objects. Presentation Techniques
of Engineering Drawings – Title Blocks – Printing/Plotting the 2D/3D drawing using printer and
printing solid object using 3D printer.
Self-study: CAD commands for modelling and views generation
MODULE 5: SIMPLE DESIGN PROJECTS - COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING (15L)
Creation of engineering models and their presentation in standard 2D form, 3D Wire‐Frame and
shaded solids, meshed topologies for engineering analysis, tool‐path generation for component
manufacture, geometric dimensioning and tolerancing. Use of solid‐modelling software for creating
associative models at the components and assembly levels in their respective branch of engineering
like building floor plans that include: windows, doors, fixtures such as WC, Sink, shower, slide block,
etc. Applying colour coding according to drawing practice.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jeyapoovan T, Engineering Drawing and Graphics Using AutoCAD, 7th Edition, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction to AutoCAD – 2D and 3D Design, A.Yarmwood, Newnes
2. Engineering Drawing and Graphic Technology‐International Edition, Thomas E.
3. Engineering Drawing and Design, Sixth Edition, C. Jensen, J.D. Helsel, D.R.
4. Technical Drawing‐Fourteenth Edition, F. E. Giesecke, A. Mitchell, H. C.
5. Bhatt N.D and Panchal V.M, Engineering Drawing: Plane and Solid Geometry,
6. Warren J. Luzadder and Jon. M. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing,
E BOOKS
1. http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐j‐
benjamin‐pentex‐free‐ebook‐pdf‐download.html
2. http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐p‐i‐
varghese.html
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019/
39
COURSE TITLE MATRICES AND CALCULUS CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE MAA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-2-0
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL – 4
Able to study the concepts of matrices and apply them in related engineering 1,2,4
1.
problems.
2. Capable to use the features of Differential Calculus in optimization problems. 1,2,4
3. Able to extend the concepts of integral calculus in finding area and volume. 1,2,4
4. Skilled to solve ordinary differential equations in engineering problems. 1,2,4
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: MATRICES (13L+2P)
Characteristic equation – Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Properties – Cayley Hamilton theorem
(Statement only) – Verification and inverse of the matrix using Cayley Hamilton theorem‐
Diagonalization of matrices using similarity transformation.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Matrices
Lab 1: Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Verification and inverse using Cayley Hamilton theorem‐
Diagonalization
MODULE 2: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS (13L+2P)
Methods of differentiation of functions – Product and Quotient rules – Inverse trigonometric
functions – Implicit function – parametric form. Partial differentiation – Total differentiation‐ Taylor’s
series – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Differentiation
Lab 2: Taylor’s series – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables
MODULE 3: INTEGRAL CALCULUS (13L+2P)

Integration – Methods of integration – Substitution method – Integration by parts – Integration using
partial fraction – Bernoulli’s formula. Applications of Integral Calculus: Area, Surface and Volume.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Integrations
Lab 3: Applications of Integral Calculus: Area, Surface area and Volume.
MODULE 4: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (13L+2P)

Second order differential equations with constant coefficients – Particular integrals –
eax , Sinax, Cosax, xm , e ax Cos bx, e ax Sin bx. Solutions of homogeneous differential equations with
variable coefficients – Variation of parameters.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Differential Equations.
Lab 4: Solution of Second order differential equations.
40
TEXT BOOKS
1 Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition,
2014.
2 Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, Eighth Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd., 2011.
3 Chandrasekaran A, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics I”, Dhanam Publications,
Chennai, 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS
7. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
8. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, Thomas’ Calculus, 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
9. Advanced Engineering Mathematics With Matlab, Third Edition,2011 by CRC Press.
E BOOKS
4. https://www.edx.org/.../introduction‐engineering‐mathematics‐utarlingtonx‐engr3
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/engineering‐mathematics
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(Common to ECE,EEE,CSE & IT)
COURSE CODE PHA4102 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL- 3
Solve basic problems in mechanics and also understand the properties of 1,2,12
1.
matter.
Have knowledge of acoustics and ultrasonics which would facilitate in 1,2,12
2. acoustical design of buildings and also be able to employ ultrasonics as an
engineering tool.
3. Knowledge on fundamental concepts of Quantum physics. 1,2,12
4. Have fundamental knowledge on semiconductors and discrete devices. 1,2,12
5. Understand the concept, working and application of lasers and fiber optics. 1,2,12
Prerequisites : Knowledge in fundamentals of physics at higher secondary level.
MODULE 1: PROPERTIES OF MATTER & HEAT (9L)
Elasticity ‐ Hooke’s law – Elastic Moduli – Young’s modulus ‐ Rigidity modulus ‐ Bulk modulus ‐
Twisting couple on a wire ‐ Torsional pendulum ‐ determination of rigidity modulus of a wire ‐
Depression of a cantilever ‐ Young’s modulus by cantilever ‐ uniform and non‐uniform bending.
Thermal conductivity – experimental determination of thermal conductivity of good and bad
conductors – Forbe’s method – theory and experiment – Lee’s disc method for bad conductors.
41
MODULE 2 – ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS (9L)

Classification of sound ‐ characteristics of musical sound – intensity ‐ loudness ‐ Weber Fechner law
‐ Decibel ‐ Reverberation ‐ Reverberation time, derivation of Sabine’s formula for reverberation
time(Jaeger’s method) ‐ absorption coefficient and its determination ‐ factors affecting acoustics of
building (Optimum reverberation time, loudness, focusing, echo, echelon effect, resonance and
noise) and their remedies ‐ Ultrasonics‐ production – Magnetostriction and Piezoelectric methods –
properties – applications.
MODULE 3 – QUANTUM PHYSICS (9L)
Black body radiation‐ Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien's displacement law and
Rayleigh – Jean’s law from Planck's theory – Compton effect – Theory and experimental verification –
Schrödinger's wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical
significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box Extension to 3 dimension (no
derivation)
MODULE 4 –CRYSTAL PHYSICS AND MAGNETISM (9L)
Crystal ‐ Lattice ‐ Unit cell ‐ Bravais lattice ‐ Lattice planes ‐ Miller indices ‐ ‘d’ spacing in cubic lattice
‐ Calculation of number of atoms per unit cell ‐ Atomic radius ‐ coordination number ‐ Packing factor
for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures.
Magnetic dipole moment ‐ atomic magnetic moments‐ magnetic permeability and susceptibility ‐
Types of magnetism: diamagnetism ‐ paramagnetism ‐ ferromagnetism ‐ antiferromagnetism –
ferrimagnetism ‐ domain structure – hysteresis ‐ hard and soft magnetic materials – applications.
MODULE 5 – PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS (9L)
Principle of lasers ‐ Stimulated absorption ‐ Spontaneous emission, stimulated emission ‐ population

inversion ‐ pumping action ‐ active medium ‐ laser characteristics – Nd‐Yag laser ‐CO2 laser ‐
Semiconductor laser ‐ applications ‐ optical fiber ‐ principle and propagation of light in optical fibers ‐
Numerical aperture and acceptance angle ‐ types of optical fibers ‐ single and multimode, step index
and graded index fibers ‐ fiber optic communication system.
LAB / MINI PROJECT / FIELD WORK

NA
TEXT BOOKS
1 P.Mani, “ Engineering Physics”, Vol‐I & II, Dhanam Publications, Chennai. (2011)
2 Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L., “Engineering Physics”, 8th edition, Dhanpat Rai publications (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi. (2010)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Arthur Beiser, "Concepts of Modern Physics", Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publications. (2007)
2 Rajendran V. Marikani A., “Applied Physics for engineers”, 3rd edition, Tata Mc Graw –Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi. (2003)
42
E BOOKS
1 https://www.bookyards.com/en/book/details/13921/Elements‐Of‐Properties‐Of‐Matter
2 http://iopscience.iop.org/book/978‐1‐6817‐4585‐5
3 https://www.springer.com/in/book/9783319206295
MOOC
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101054/12
ENGINEERING MATERIALS
(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)
COURSE CODE CYA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Suggest suitable metals for alloying. 1,2,4,6,12
2. Identify the materials apt for engineering applications. 1,2,4,6,12
3 Select high temperature materials for engineering applications. 1,2,4,6,12
4. Map the properties of nanomaterials with their applications. 1,2,4,6,12
5. Suggest suitable materials for electronic applications. 1,2,4,6,12
Prerequisites: Knowledge in fundamentals of chemistry at higher secondary level.
MODULE 1 – CRYSTAL STRUCTURE AND PHASE RULE (9L)

Basic Crystal Systems – Types, characteristics, examples – Space lattice, Unit cell – types – X‐ray
diffraction and crystal structure.
Basic terminology ‐ Derivation of Gibbs Phase rule‐ Phase diagrams: One component system (water),
Two component system –‐ Reduced phase rule: Simple Eutectic system, examples, Phase diagram: Ag‐
Pb system, Pb‐Sn system – Applications of phase rule.
MODULE 2 – POWDER METALLURGY, INORGANIC MATERIALS AND COMPOSITES. (9L)
Steel – Composition, types, heat‐treatment, Abrasives – Classification, Properties, Uses ‐ Refractories –
Classification, Properties, Applications. Glasses – Properties, Types, Specialty glasses.
Composites ‐ Introduction ‐ Definition – Constituents – Classification ‐ Fiber‐reinforced Composites –
Types and Applications.
Powder Metallurgy – Preparation of metal/alloy– Advantages and limitations.
MODULE 3 – NANOMATERIALS AND MOLECULAR SIEVES (9L)
Introduction – Synthesis of Nanomaterials ‐ Bottom‐up and Top‐down approaches – Methods of
preparation – Sol‐gel process, Gas‐phase condensation, Chemical Vapour Deposition. Properties –
Optical, Electrical, Magnetic, Chemical properties (introduction only). Characterization – FE‐SEM, TEM
(Principle and Applications only).
Zeolite Molecular sieves – composition, structure, classification ‐ applications – ion exchange,
adsorption, separation, laundry, catalysis.
43
MODULE 4 – MATERIALS FOR ELECTRONIC APPLICATONS (9L)

Liquid Crystals‐ Introduction – Characteristics – Classification‐ Thermotropic crystals‐ ‐ Polymorphism
in Thermotropic Liquid Crystals – Molecular arrangement in various states of Liquid Crystals, Lyotropic
Liquid Crystals‐ Applications.
Conducting and Super conducting Organic electronic materials ‐ Applications.
Engineering plastics: Polycarbonate – Properties and uses‐ Conducting Polymers: Classification, Intrinsic
Conducting Polymers, Extrinsic Conducting Polymers, Applications ‐ Biodegradable Polymers, examples
and applications.
MODULE 5 – LUBRICANTS, ADHESIVES AND EXPLOSIVES (9L)
Lubricants – Mechanism of Lubrication, Classification and Properties, Semi Solid Lubricants, Solid
Lubricants, MoS2 and Graphite ‐ Adhesives – Development of Adhesive strength, Physical and Chemical
factors influencing adhesive action, Classification of Adhesives – Epoxy Resin (Preparation, Properties
and Applications). Explosives – Requisites, Classification, Precautions during storage – Rocket
propellants – Requisites ‐ Classification.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
P.C. Jain and Monicka Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Raj Publishing Company (P) Ltd, New
1
Delhi – 2012
2 Puri, Sharma and Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing Co. Jalandar, 2004.
3 Composite materials, K.K. Chawala, 3rd ed., (2012) Springer‐Verlag, New York
Nanocomposite Science and Technology, P. M. Ajayan, L. S. Schadler, P. V. Braun, (2003), Wiley‐
4
VCH Verlag GmbH Co. KGaA, Weinheim.
Mechanics and Analysis of Composite Materials, V.V. Vasiliev and E.V. Morozov, (2001), Elsevier
5
Science Ltd, The Boulevard, Langford Lane, Kidlington, Oxford OX5 lGB, UK.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐
ebook.html
2 https://abmpk.files.wordpress.com/2014/02/book_maretial‐science‐callister.pdf `
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/materials‐science‐engineering‐misisx‐mse1x
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/materials‐science
44
COURSE TITLE PROBLEM SOLVING USING C CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSA4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 2-0-2-0
CIA 60% ESE 40%
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1 Describe the basics of digital computer and programming languages. 1,2,8,12
Demonstrate problem solving techniques using flowchart, 1,2,3,5,12
2
algorithm/pseudo code to solve the given problem.
3 Design and Implement C program using Control Statements and Functions. 1,2,3,5,9,10,12
4 Design and Implement C program using Pointers and File operations. 1,2,3,12
5 Identify the need for embedded C in real‐time applications. 1,2,6,12
Prerequisites: Nil
MODULE 1 – PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND PROBLEM SOLVING TECHNIQUES (6L+6P)
Introduction – Fundamentals of digital computers ‐ Programming languages ‐Programming
Paradigms – Types of Programming Languages – Language Translators – Problem Solving
Techniques: Algorithm – Flow Chart ‐ Pseudo code.
Practical Component:
Drawing Flowcharts using E‐ Chart & Writing pseudo code for the following problems
(i) Greatest of three numbers
(ii) Sum of N numbers
(iii) Computation of nCr
MODULE 2: FUNDAMENTALS OF C (6L+6P)
Evolution of C ‐Why C language ‐ Applications of C language ‐ Data Types in C – Operators and
Expressions – Input and Output statements in C – Decision Statements – Loop Control Statements.
(i) Program to illustrate arithmetic and logical operators
(ii) Program to read and print data of different types
(iii) Program to calculate area and volume of various geometrical shapes
(iv) Program to compute biggest of three numbers
(v) Program to print multiplication table
(vi) Program to convert days to years, months and days
(vii) Program to find sum of the digits of an integer.
MODULE 3: FUNCTIONS, ARRAYS AND STRINGS (6L+6P)
Functions – Storage Class – Arrays – Strings and standard functions ‐ Pre‐processor Statements.
(i) Program to compute Factorial, Fibonacci series and sum of n numbers using recursion
(ii) Program to compute sum and average of N Numbers stored in an array
(iii) Program to sort the given n numbers stored in an array
(iv) Program to search for the given element in an array
45
(v) Program to do word count

(vi) Program to insert a substring in a string
(vii) Program to concatenate and compare two strings
(viii) Program using pre‐processor statements
MODULE 4: POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND UNION (6L+6P)
Pointers – Dynamic Memory allocation – Structure and Union – Files.
(i) Program to compute sum of integers stored in a 1‐D array using pointers and dynamic memory
allocation
(ii) Program to read and print records of a student/payroll database using structures
(iii) Program to simulate file copy
(iv) Program to illustrate sequential access file
(v) Program to illustrate random access file
MODULE 5: INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED C (6L+6P)
Structure of embedded C program ‐ Data Types ‐ Operators ‐ Statements ‐ Functions ‐ Keil C
Compiler.
Practical component:
Simple programs using embedded C
NA
TEXT BOOKS
Jeyapoovan T, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, Vikas Publishing house,
1.
2015.
Mark Siegesmund, "Embedded C Programming", first edition, Elsevier publications,
2.
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ashok Kamthane, “Computer Programming”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, Inc 2017.
2. Yashavant Kanetkar, “Let us C”, 15th edition, BPP publication, 2016.
S.Sathyalakshmi, S.Dinakar, “Computer Programming Practicals – Computer Lab Manual”,
3.
Dhanam Publication, First Edition, July 2013.
E BOOKS
1. https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/C_Programming
MOOC
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18‐cs10/preview
3. https://www.udemy.com/c‐programming‐for‐beginners/
4. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/c‐programming
46
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CREDIT 3

COURSE CODE CSB4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 2- 0- 2 -1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
Appreciate the different elements involved in good designs and to apply them in
1. 1,2,5,12
practice when called for.
Be aware of the product oriented and user‐oriented aspects that make the 1,2,5,12
2.
design a success.
Think of innovative designs incorporating different segments of knowledge 1,2,5,12
3
gained in the course
Have a broader perspective of design covering function, cost, environmental 1,2,5,12
4.
sensitivity, safety and other factors other than engineering analysis.
5. Learn economic and environmental Issues, trade aspects and IPR 1,2,5,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ENGINEERING DESIGN (7L+2P)
Design and its objectives; Design constraints, Design functions, Design means and Design from; Role
of Science, Engineering and Technology in design; Engineering as a business proposition; Functional
and Strength Designs. Design form, function and strength; How to initiate creative designs? Initiating
the thinking process for designing a product of daily use. Need identification; Problem Statement;
Market survey‐customer requirements; Design attributes and objectives; Ideation; Brain storming
approaches; arriving at solutions; Closing on to the Design needs.
Project: An Exercise in the process of design initiation. A simple problem is to be taken up to examine
different solutions‐ Ceiling fan, Group Presentation and discussion.
MODULE 2: PROCESSES IN DESIGN FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING (7L+2P)
Design process‐ Different stages in design and their significance; Defining the design space; Analogies
and “thinking outside of the box”; Quality function deployment‐meeting what the customer wants;
Evaluation and choosing of a design. Design Communication; Realization of the concept into a
configuration, drawing and model. Concept of “Complex is Simple”. Design for function and strength.
Design detailing‐ Material selection, Design visualization‐ Solid modelling; Detailed 2D drawings;
Tolerance; Use of standard items in design; Research needs in design; Energy needs of the design,
both in its realization and in the applications.
Project: An exercise in the detailed design of any architecture.
MODULE 3: PROTOTYPING IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING DESIGN (4L+5P)

Prototyping‐ rapid prototyping; testing and evaluation of design; Design modifications; Freezing the
design; Cost analysis.
Engineering the design – From prototype to product. Planning; Scheduling; Supply chains; inventory;
handling; manufacturing/construction operations; storage; packaging; shipping; marketing; feed‐back
on design
Project: List out the standards organizations. Prepare a list of standard items used in any CSE
specialization. Develop any design with over 50% standard items as parts.
47
MODULE 4: QUALITY ASPECTS IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING DESIGN (4L+5P)

Design for “X”; covering quality, reliability, safety, manufacturing/construction, assembly,
maintenance, logistics, handling; disassembly; recycling; re‐engineering etc.
Project: Example: List out the design methods for cloud based structure.
MODULE 5: USER CENTRED DESIGNS IN COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING (4L+5P)
Product centered and user centered design. Product centered attributes and user centered attributes.
Bringing the two closer. Example: Smart phone. Aesthetics and ergonomics. Value engineering,
Concurrent engineering, Reverse engineering in design; Culture based design; Architectural designs;
Motifs and cultural background; Tradition and design; Study the evolution of Software Designs; Role of
colours in design.Design as a marketing tool; Intellectual Property rights – Trade secret; patent; copy‐
right; trademarks; product liability. Group presentation of any such products covering all aspects that
could make or mar it.
Project: Examine the possibility of value addition for an existing product.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Balmer, R. T., Keat, W. D., Wise, G., and Kosky, P., Exploring Engineering, Third Edition: An
1. Introduction to Engineering and Design ‐ [Part 3 ‐ Chapters 17 to 27], ISBN13: 978‐0124158917
ISBN‐10: 0124158919
2. Dym, C. L., Little, P. and Orwin, E. J., Engineering Design ‐ A Project based introduction ‐ Wiley,
ISBN‐978‐1‐118‐32458‐5
3. Eastman, C. M. (Ed.), Design for X Concurrent engineering imperatives, 1996, XI, 489 p. ISBN 978‐
94‐011‐3985‐4 Springer
4. Haik, Y. And Shahin, M. T., Engineering Design Process, Cengage Learning, ISBN‐13: 978‐0‐495‐
66816‐9
5. Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J. and Grote, K. H., Engineering Design: A Systematic
Approach, 3rd ed. 2007, XXI, 617p., ISBN 978‐1‐84628‐319‐2
6. Voland, G., Engineering by Design, ISBN 978‐93‐325‐3505‐3, Pearson India
48
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB CREDIT 0.5

COURSE CODE GEA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-2
CIA 80% ESE 20%
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to Identify
1 and use of tools, Types of joints used in welding, carpentry and plumbing 1,2,4,6,12
operations.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques such as carpentry and
2 1,2,4,6,12
plumbing practices.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques of different types of
3 1,2,4,6,12
welding and basic machining practices.
SLOT X - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP
1. Welding: Arc welding: Butt joints
2. Lap joints.
3. Machining: Facing
4. Turning
II. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
1. Dismantling and Studying of two stroke gasoline engine.
2. Assembling of two stroke gasoline engine.
3. Dismantling and Studying of four stroke gasoline engine
4. Assembling of four stroke gasoline engine.
III. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of Flow Pattern around Various Objects.
2. Force measurement on Aircraft Model
3. Determination of Young's Modulus for Aluminum Cantilever Beam
4. Binary Addition & Subtraction using Microprocessor
IV. CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Plumbing‐ Basic Pipe Connection using valves, couplings and elbows.
2. Carpentry – Sowing, Planning and making common Joints.
3. Bar Bending
4. Construction of a 50 cm height brick wall without mortar using English Bond.
SLOT Y - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
V.ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of tools and accessories.
2. Study of cables.
3. Staircase wiring, Tube light and Fan connection.
4. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
VI. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Active and Passive Components.
2. Study of Logic Circuits.
3. Making simple circuit using Electronic Components.
4. Measuring of parameters for signal using CRO.
49
VII. COMPUTER SCIENCE

1. Troubleshooting different parts of the computer peripherals, Monitor, Keyboard & CPU.
2. Installation of various operating systems, their capabilities, Windows, Unix, Linux.
3. Installation of commonly used software like MS Office
4. Assembling digital computer.
VIII. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Key Elements of Mechatronics Systems
2. Sensors – Load Cell, Thermocouple
3. Actuators – Linear & Rotary Actuators
4. Interfacing & Measurements – Virtual Instrumentation
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jeyapoovan T and Saravanapandian M., Engineering practices lab manual, 4th Edition, Vikas
publishing House, New Delhi, 2015.
2 Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
3 Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011
4 Robert Quesada, Jeyapoovan T., Computer Numerical Control Machining and Turning Centers,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006
METHOD OF ALLOCATION FOR ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB
SLOT X : MECH, AERO, AUTO, CIVIL EXPERIMENTS
SLOT Y : EEE, ELECTRONICS, CSE, MECHATRONICS EXPERIMENTS
 EVERY CLASS OF
 GROUP A (AERO, AUTO, MECH, MCT, CHEM, BIO, CIVIL
 GROUP B (CSE, IT, ECE, EEE, AEROSPACE)
GETS DIVIDED INTO 4 SUB ‐ GROUPS NAMELY a, b, c, d ‐‐ EACH CONSISTING OF 15 TO 20 STUDENTS
MAX.
 FOR EXAMPLE: GROUP A STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT X
 WEEK 1 : SLOT X ‐‐‐
 a – MECH; b – AUTO; c – AERO ; d – CIVIL
 b – MECH; c – AUTO; d – AERO ; a – CIVIL
 THE ABOVE SCHEDULE WILL BE ON ROTATION EVERY MONTH (ONE CYLCE PER MONTH)
 GROUP B STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT Y
 WEEK 1 : SLOT Y ‐‐‐
 a – EEE; b – ECE; c – CSE ; d – MCT
 b – EEE; c – ECE; d – CSE ; a – MCT
50
ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY

COURSE TITLE CREDIT 1
(Common to all engineering branches)
CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Analyze material’s elastic properties. 1,2,3,4,12
2. Determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor. 1,2,3,4,12
3. Measure coefficient of viscosity of liquids. 1,2,3,4,12
4. Determine wavelength of laser. 1,2,3,4,12
5. Describe V‐I characteristics of diode. 1,2,3,4,12
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic physics practical at higher secondary level.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (ANY FIVE EXPERIMENTS)
1. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of the material of a wire.
2. Non Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
3. Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
4. Viscosity – Determination of co‐efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s flow.
5. Lee’s Disc – Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
6. Air – Wedge – Determination of thickness of a thin wire
7. Spectrometer – refractive index of a prism
8. Semiconductor laser – Determination of wavelength of laser using grating
9. Semiconductor diode – VI characteristics
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Chemical Kinetics with MATLAB
2. StoichTools with MATLAB : Tools for Doing Stoichiometry
3. plot Hydrogen Atom Molecular Orbital using MATLAB.
4. Processing of chromatography data in the MATLAB programming
5. Atomistic Topology Operations in Matlab
TEXT BOOK
1. P. Mani, engineering Physics Practicals, Dhanam Publications, Chennai, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Glenn V.Lo, Jesus Urrechaga ‐ Aituna, Introductory Physics Laboratory Manual, Part‐I, Fall 2005
Edition.
2. P. Kulkarni, Experiments in Engineering Physics Bachelor of Engineering and Technology, Edition
2015
E BOOK
1 http://www.aurora.ac.in/images/pdf/departments/humanities‐and‐sciences/engg‐phy‐lab‐
manual.pdf
51
MATERIALS CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

(Common to ALL branches of Engineering)
CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Characterize basic properties of refractory ceramics 1,2,4,6
2. Prepare resins and composites. 1,2,4,6
3. Estimate metal ions present in samples using instrumental techniques. 1,2,4,6
4. Develop adsorption isotherm. 1,2,4,6
5. Find properties of lubricants and other oil samples. 1,2,4,6
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic chemistry practical at higher secondary level.
1. Construction of Phenol‐Water Phase diagram.
2. Determination of viscosity of polymer using Ostwald Viscometer.
3. Preparation of urea‐formaldehyde resin.
4. Determination of porosity of a refractory.
5. Determination of Apparent Density of porous solids.
6. Determination of Viscosity Index of lubricants.
7. Estimation of dye content in the effluent by UV‐Visible spectrophotometry.
8. Determination of viscosity of oil using Red‐Wood Viscometer.
9. Determination of Copper / iron content in the alloy by colorimetry.
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium ions by Flame Photometry.
11. Verification of Beer‐Lambert’s law using gold nanoparticles.
12. Determination of adsorption isotherm for acetic acid on activated charcoal.
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Display and manipulate 3‐D molecule structure
2. Implement an example for dose‐response fitting
3. Learn Differential Equations with MATLAB.
4. Acquire and plot angular velocity and orientation data
5. Plot and Visualize Categorical Data
REFERENCE BOOKS
J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J.D. Barnes and N.J.K. Thomas, Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative
1.
Chemical Analysis, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8th edition, McGraw Hill,
2.
London, 2008
3. S. Sumathi, Laboratory work book for Engineering Chemistry Practical, 2015
Laboratory Manual of Testing Materials, William Kendrick Hatt and Herbert Henry Scofield,
4.
Andesite Press, 2017
E BOOKS
1. http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐book.html
MOOC
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/chemistry/5‐111‐principles‐of‐chemical‐science‐fall‐2008/video‐
1
lectures/lecture‐32/
2 https://www.coursetalk.com/providers/coursera/courses/introduction‐to‐chemistry‐1
52
SEMESTER II
COURSE TITLE ANALYTICAL MATHEMATICS CREDITS 4
COURSE CODE MAA4117 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3- 0- 2- 0
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL:1-4
1. Evaluate surface and volume integrals. 1,2,4,12
2. Perform vector operations and interpret the results geometrically. 1,2,4,12
3. Solve the system of ordinary differential equations using Laplace Transform. 1,2,4,12
4. Know that any periodic function satisfying Dirichlet’s conditions can be expressed 1,2,4,12
as a Fourier series.
5. Understand complex variable theory, applications of analytic function and 1,2,4,12
harmonic conjugate.
MODULE 1: MULTIPLE INTEGRALS (10L+2P)
Double integration – Cartesian and polar co‐ordinates – Change of order of integration. Area as a
double integral – Triple integration in Cartesian coordinates – Volume as a triple integral – Change of
variables between Cartesian and polar coordinates.
Suggested Reading: Line Integrals
Lab: Area and Volume of double integration and triple integration.
MODULE 2: VECTOR CALCULUS (10L+2P)
Gradient, Divergence and Curl – Unit normal vector, Directional derivative – angle between surfaces –
Solenoidal and Irrotational vector fields. Green’s theorem ‐ Gauss divergence theorem and Stoke’s
theorem (without proof) – Verification and evaluation of the above theorems ‐ Simple applications to
regions such as square, rectangle, triangle, cuboids and rectangular parallelepiped.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Vectors
Lab: Area using Green’s theorem and Volume using Gauss divergence theorem
MODULE 3: LAPLACE TRANSFORMS (10L+2P)
Laplace transform – Conditions of existence – Transform of elementary functions – properties –
Transforms of derivatives– Initial and final value theorems – Transform of periodic functions. Inverse
Laplace transforms using partial fraction and convolution theorem. Solution of linear ODE of second
order with constant coefficients.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Transform
Lab: Finding Laplace and Inverse Laplace Transform of Elementary Functions, Solutions of Ordinary
differential equations using Laplace transform
MODULE 4: FOURIER SERIES (10L+2P)
Dirichlet’s Conditions – General Fourier Series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine and cosine
series –Harmonic Analysis.
Suggested Reading: Basics of series
Lab: Fourier series Expansion of simple functions, Harmonic Analysis
53
MODULE 5: COMPLEX VARIABLES (10L+2P)

Functions of a complex variable – Analytic function – Cauchy ‐ Riemann equations (Statement only) –
Properties of analytic function (Statement only) – Construction of Analytic functions by Milne –
Thomson method.
Suggested Reading: Complex Numbers
Lab: Complex Numbers
TEXT BOOKS
1. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, New
Delhi, 2016.
2. A.P.Santhakumaran, P.Titus, Engineering Mathematics ‐ II, NiMeric Publications, Nagercoil,
2012.
3. Chandrasekaran A, Engineering Mathematics‐ II, Dhanam Publication, 2014
4. Raj Kumar Bansal, Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its Applications in
Engineering”, Pearson Publication, Second Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sastry, S.S, ―Engineering Mathema cs", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 4th Edition, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Wylie, R.C. and Barre , L.C., ―Advanced Engineering Mathema cs ―Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Dean G. Duffy., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB”, CRC Press, Third Edition
2013.
E BOOKS
1. http.// nptel.ac.in/courses/122104017/28
2. https://www.khanacademy.org/.../double‐integrals.../double‐integral.
3. nptel.ac.in/courses/115101005/downloads/lectures‐doc/Lecture‐1.p
4. nptel.ac.in/syllabus/122104017/
5. nptel.ac.in/courses/111105035/22
6. nptel.ac.in/syllabus/111103070/
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐engineering‐mathematics‐utarlingtonx‐engr3‐0x
54
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(Common to ECE,EEE,CSE & IT)
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL- 3
Solve basic problems in mechanics and also understand the properties of 1,2
1.
matter.
Have knowledge of acoustics and ultrasonics which would facilitate in 1,2
2. acoustical design of buildings and also be able to employ ultrasonics as an
engineering tool.
3. Knowledge on fundamental concepts of Quantum physics. 1,2
4. Have fundamental knowledge on semiconductors and discrete devices. 1,2
5. Understand the concept, working and application of lasers and fiber optics. 1,2
Prerequisites: Knowledge in fundamentals of physics at higher secondary level.
MODULE 1: PROPERTIES OF MATTER & HEAT (9L)
Elasticity ‐ Hooke’s law – Elastic Moduli – Young’s modulus ‐ Rigidity modulus ‐ Bulk modulus ‐
Twisting couple on a wire ‐ Torsional pendulum ‐ determination of rigidity modulus of a wire ‐
Depression of a cantilever ‐ Young’s modulus by cantilever ‐ uniform and non‐uniform bending.
Thermal conductivity – experimental determination of thermal conductivity of good and bad
conductors – Forbe’s method – theory and experiment – Lee’s disc method for bad conductors.
MODULE 2 – ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS (9L)
Classification of sound ‐ characteristics of musical sound – intensity ‐ loudness ‐ Weber Fechner law
‐ Decibel ‐ Reverberation ‐ Reverberation time, derivation of Sabine’s formula for reverberation
time(Jaeger’s method) ‐ absorption coefficient and its determination ‐ factors affecting acoustics of
building (Optimum reverberation time, loudness, focusing, echo, echelon effect, resonance and
noise) and their remedies ‐ Ultrasonics‐ production – Magnetostriction and Piezoelectric methods –
properties – applications.
MODULE 3 – QUANTUM PHYSICS (9L)
Black body radiation‐ Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien's displacement law and
Rayleigh – Jean’s law from Planck's theory – Compton effect – Theory and experimental verification –
Schrödinger's wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical
significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box Extension to 3 dimension (no
derivation)
MODULE 4 –CRYSTAL PHYSICS AND MAGNETISM (9L)
Crystal ‐ Lattice ‐ Unit cell ‐ Bravais lattice ‐ Lattice planes ‐ Miller indices ‐ ‘d’ spacing in cubic lattice
‐ Calculation of number of atoms per unit cell ‐ Atomic radius ‐ coordination number ‐ Packing factor
for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures.
55
Magnetic dipole moment ‐ atomic magnetic moments‐ magnetic permeability and susceptibility ‐
Types of magnetism: diamagnetism ‐ paramagnetism ‐ ferromagnetism ‐ antiferromagnetism –
ferrimagnetism ‐ domain structure – hysteresis ‐ hard and soft magnetic materials – applications.
MODULE 5 – PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS (9L)
Principle of lasers ‐ Stimulated absorption ‐ Spontaneous emission, stimulated emission ‐ population

inversion ‐ pumping action ‐ active medium ‐ laser characteristics – Nd‐Yag laser ‐CO2 laser ‐
Semiconductor laser ‐ applications ‐ optical fiber ‐ principle and propagation of light in optical fibers ‐
Numerical aperture and acceptance angle ‐ types of optical fibers ‐ single and multimode, step index
and graded index fibers ‐ fiber optic communication system.
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1 P.Mani, “ Engineering Physics”, Vol‐I & II, Dhanam Publications, Chennai. (2011)
2 Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L., “Engineering Physics”, 8th edition, Dhanpat Rai publications (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi. (2010)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Arthur Beiser, "Concepts of Modern Physics", Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publications. (2007)
2 Rajendran V. Marikani A., “Applied Physics for engineers”, 3rd edition, Tata Mc Graw –Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi. (2003)
E BOOKS
1 https://www.bookyards.com/en/book/details/13921/Elements‐Of‐Properties‐Of‐Matter
2 http://iopscience.iop.org/book/978‐1‐6817‐4585‐5
3 https://www.springer.com/in/book/9783319206295
MOOC
56
ENGINEERING MATERIALS
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Suggest suitable metals for alloying. 1,2,4,6
2. Identify the materials apt for engineering applications. 1,2,4,6
3 Select high temperature materials for engineering applications. 1,2,4,6
4. Map the properties of nanomaterials with their applications. 1,2,4,6
5. Suggest suitable materials for electronic applications. 1,2,4,6
MODULE 1 – CRYSTAL STRUCTURE AND PHASE RULE (9L)

Basic Crystal Systems – Types, characteristics, examples – Space lattice, Unit cell – types – X‐ray
diffraction and crystal structure.
Basic terminology ‐ Derivation of Gibbs Phase rule‐ Phase diagrams: One component system (water),
Two component system –‐ Reduced phase rule: Simple Eutectic system, examples, Phase diagram: Ag‐
Pb system, Pb‐Sn system – Applications of phase rule.
MODULE 2 – POWDER METALLURGY, INORGANIC MATERIALS AND COMPOSITES. (9L)
Steel – Composition, types, heat‐treatment, Abrasives – Classification, Properties, Uses ‐ Refractories –
Classification, Properties, Applications. Glasses – Properties, Types, Specialty glasses.
Composites ‐ Introduction ‐ Definition – Constituents – Classification ‐ Fiber‐reinforced Composites –
Types and Applications.
Powder Metallurgy – Preparation of metal/alloy– Advantages and limitations.
MODULE 3 – NANOMATERIALS AND MOLECULAR SIEVES (9L)
Introduction – Synthesis of Nanomaterials ‐ Bottom‐up and Top‐down approaches – Methods of
preparation – Sol‐gel process, Gas‐phase condensation, Chemical Vapour Deposition. Properties –
Optical, Electrical, Magnetic, Chemical properties (introduction only). Characterization – FE‐SEM, TEM
(Principle and Applications only).
Zeolite Molecular sieves – composition, structure, classification ‐ applications – ion exchange,
adsorption, separation, laundry, catalysis.
MODULE 4 – MATERIALS FOR ELECTRONIC APPLICATONS (9L)
Liquid Crystals‐ Introduction – Characteristics – Classification‐ Thermotropic crystals‐ ‐ Polymorphism
in Thermotropic Liquid Crystals – Molecular arrangement in various states of Liquid Crystals, Lyotropic
Liquid Crystals‐ Applications.
Conducting and Super conducting Organic electronic materials ‐ Applications.
57
Engineering plastics: Polycarbonate – Properties and uses‐ Conducting Polymers: Classification, Intrinsic
Conducting Polymers, Extrinsic Conducting Polymers, Applications ‐ Biodegradable Polymers, examples
and applications.
MODULE 5 – LUBRICANTS, ADHESIVES AND EXPLOSIVES (9L)
Lubricants – Mechanism of Lubrication, Classification and Properties, Semi Solid Lubricants, Solid
Lubricants, MoS2 and Graphite ‐ Adhesives – Development of Adhesive strength, Physical and Chemical
factors influencing adhesive action, Classification of Adhesives – Epoxy Resin (Preparation, Properties
and Applications). Explosives – Requisites, Classification, Precautions during storage – Rocket
propellants – Requisites ‐ Classification.
NA
TEXT BOOKS
P.C. Jain and Monicka Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Raj Publishing Company (P) Ltd, New
1.
Delhi – 2012
2. Puri, Sharma and Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing Co. Jalandar, 2004.
3. Composite materials, K.K. Chawala, 3rd ed., (2012) Springer‐Verlag, New York
Nanocomposite Science and Technology, P. M. Ajayan, L. S. Schadler, P. V. Braun, (2003), Wiley‐
4.
VCH Verlag GmbH Co. KGaA, Weinheim.
Mechanics and Analysis of Composite Materials, V.V. Vasiliev and E.V. Morozov, (2001), Elsevier
5.
Science Ltd, The Boulevard, Langford Lane, Kidlington, Oxford OX5 lGB, UK.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐
ebook.html
2. https://abmpk.files.wordpress.com/2014/02/book_maretial‐science‐callister.pdf `
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/materials‐science‐engineering‐misisx‐mse1x
2. https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/materials‐science
58
COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH AND SOFT SKILLS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ELA4101 COURSE CATEGORY HS L-T-P-S 1- 1- 2- 1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
Understand the importance of professional communication and applying the 8,9,10
1.
knowledge.
Integrate the knowledge of phonetics, enhancing the listening skills in formal and real‐ 8,9,10
2.
life situations, enhance pronunciation skills based on the knowledge of phonetics.
Construct appropriate sentences in English Language, applying grammatical rules and 8,9,10
3. mastery in syntax. Develop reading skills and derive the contextual meaning, case
studies and analyzing problems.
Integrate creativity in the writing skills both in formal and informal situations, related 8,9,10
4.
to environment, society and multidisciplinary environments.
5. Imbibe soft skills to excel in interpersonal skills essential for workplace. 8,9,10
Prerequisites : Plus Two English‐Intermediate Level
MODULE 1 – THE ELEMENTS OF COMMUNICATION (9)
Importance of communication through English ‐Process of communication and factors that influence
speaking‐ Importance of audience and purpose‐ Principles of Communication‐comparing general
communication and business Communication‐Professional Communication‐barriers to communication –
strategies to overcome communication barriers‐formal and informal communication
Self‐introduction‐short Conversations‐Situational communication‐dialogue writing ‐Language Functions‐
analyse the speech and comment‐distinguish formal and informal style of communication‐using bias‐
free language‐ news reports.
Suggested Reading:
 Rogerson, Trish Stott & Derek Utley.2011
 Elements of Effective Communication: 4th Edition, Plain and Precious Publishing, USA, by Randal
S. Chase (Author), Wayne Shamo (Author)
 Effective Communication Skills, MTD Training & Ventus Publishing (e book)
MODULE 2 – AURAL –ORAL COMMUNICATION IN ENGLISH (9)
Vowels‐ diphthongs‐ consonants ‐ International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) ; phonemic transcription (simple
words)‐syllable division and word stress –enunciation‐GIE script(General Indian English)‐ neutral accent‐
sentence rhythm and weak forms ‐ contrastive stress in sentences to highlight different words ‐
intonation varieties of Spoken English : Standard Indian, American and British‐Speaking to Communicate‐
speech acts ‐ Language Patterns
59
(Note: This unit should be taught in a simple, non-technical manner, avoiding technical terms as far
as possible).
Suggested activities: (Audio CD) Listen and repeat, listen to the sentences and fill in the blanks, Listening
to passages and answering questions, marking the stressed syllable, phonemic script of simple words,
sentence rhythm and intonation (rising tone and falling tone), short speeches. Individual presentations‐
dynamics of a group discussion
Suggested sources:
Cambridge IELTS, Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Press, Face to face series
Cambridge University Press, Speaking Effectively, Cambridge University Press, Jeremy Comfort, Pamela.
MODULE 3 - GRAMMAR AND DEVELOPMENT OF READING SKILLS (9)
Noun Phrase, Verb Phrase, Tense and Aspect, Articles, Pronouns and determiners, Sentence Pattern,
interrogative and negative sentences‐subject verb agreement ‐Vocabulary‐word formation: prefixes and
suffixes, reading passages‐inductive vs deductive reading‐newspaper articles‐ comprehension passages
–cloze reading‐annotating‐editing
Identify the errors in sentences, grammar exercises, book reviews, mini project on suggested reading
activity ‐ reading technical passages based on student’s area of specialization answering questions‐
reading passage for identifying the contextual meaning
Suggested sources:
Skills for the TOEFL IBT Test, Collins IELTS, Cambridge books Practical English Usage by Michael Swan,
Cambridge University Press
MODULE 4 - EFFECTIVE WRITING AND BUSINESS COMMUNICATION (9)
Paragraph writing‐ topic sentence‐connectives ‐ process writing‐Memoranda‐Business letters‐Resumes
/Visumes and job applications‐drafting a report‐agenda and minutes of the meeting‐ATR‐project
proposals‐email etiquette‐ interpreting visual data (bar chart, pie chart, line graphs).
Suggested activities:
Writing short paragraph based on environment protection, societal issues, health, cultural contexts etc.,
identifying topic sentences, linking pairs of sentences, cause and effect exercises, formal letters, e mails,
drafting project proposals, drafting agenda, minutes of the meeting
Suggested sources:
Cambridge Advanced English, Newspapers, library books, IELTS, IELTS Academic Writing 1, New Insights
into IELTS, CUP.
MODULE 5 – SOFT SKILLS (9)
Introducing Soft Skills &Life Skills‐ Myers Briggs Type Indicator – the Big Five Model Personality ‐
Employability Skills‐ Workplace Etiquette‐ Professional Ethics ‐Time Management‐Stress Management‐
Lateral Thinking (De Bono’s Six Thinking Hats) and Problem Solving Skills
Mock interviews, GD’s, short oral presentation, lateral thinking puzzles, Case analysis and self‐study
assignments, Worksheet activities.
Suggested Sources:
60
Soft Skills and Employability Skills by Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez, Cambridge University Press, 2018.
Soft Skills for Everyone by Jeff Butterfield, Cengage Learning Education and personality development, K.
Manoharan English for Life and the Workplace through the LSRW&T skills, Lateral Thinking skills by
Edward De Bono.
TEXT BOOKS
1. An Introduction to Profession English and Soft Skills with audio CD by Dr. Bikram K. Das et al.
Published by Cambridge University Press, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez,"Soft Skills & Employability Skills",Cambridge University Press
2018.
2. Steve Hart et al."Embark, English for Undergraduates", Cambridge University Press, 2016
3. Skills for the TOEFL IBT Test, Collins, 2012 edition
4. Jeff Butterfield "Soft Skills for Everyone", Cengage Learning, 2010 edition
5. Dolly John,"English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T skills" Pearson Publications, 2014.
6. Aruna Koneru,"Professional Speaking Skills",Oxford Publications, 2015
The official Cambridge guide to IELTS for Academic and General Training, Cambridge University
7.
Press, 2014 edition.
8. Cambridge BEC Vantage, Self‐Study edition, Practice Tests, CUP, 2002
9. English for Business Studies, 3rd edition, Ian Mackenzie, Cambridge University Press
10. Education and Personality Development by Dr. P.K.Manoharan, APH Publishing Corporation, 2015
11. Speaking Effectively by Jeremy Comfort et al, Cambridge University Press, 2011.
E BOOKS
2. http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/features/pronunciation
3. http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/
4. http://www.antimoon.com/how/pronunc‐soundsipa.htm
5. http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/write‐and‐improve/
6. Oneshopenglish.com
7. Breakingnews.com
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/english
2. https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/adventures‐writing‐stanford‐online
3. http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/mooc/
61
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND COMPUTER AIDED

DESIGN
COURSE CODE MEA4101 COURSE CATEGORY ES L-T-P-S 1 -1- 2 -1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
Understand drafting and computer aided drafting. Remember the commands used 1,2,5
1.
in AutoCAD to generate simple drawings.
Explain details in a drawing and apply the knowledge to solve simple problems 1,2,5
2.
involving straight lines, planes and solids.
Understand and Visualize solid objects and apply AutoCAD software commands to 1,2,5
3.
generate the graphic models.
4. Apply the 3D model commands to generate and solid object. 1,2,5
Apply the viewing AutoCAD commands to generate top view, front view and 1,2,5
5.
additional or sectional views.
Develop any graphical model of geometrical and simple mechanical objects in 1,2,3,5
6.
AutoCAD software.
Prerequisites: Nil
MODULE 1: BASICS OF ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND PLANE CURVES (12L)
Importance of graphics ‐ BIS conventions and specifications ‐ drawing sheet sizes ‐ Lettering –
Dimensioning ‐ Scales. Drafting methods ‐ introduction to Computer Aided Drafting – Computer
Hardware – Workstation – Printer and Plotter – Introduction to software for Computer Aided Design
and Drafting – Exposure to Solid Modelling software – Geometrical Construction‐Coordinate
Systems/Basic Entities – 3D printer.
Self-Study: Solid modelling Software commands
MODULE 2: VISUALIZATION, ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND FREE HAND SKETCHING (15L)
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of Three‐
Dimensional objects — Pictorial Projection methods ‐ Layout of views‐ Free hand sketching of multiple
views from pictorial views of objects. Drafting of simple Geometric Objects/Editing.
General principles of presentation of technical drawings as per BIS ‐ Introduction to Orthographic
projections ‐ Naming views as per BIS ‐ First angle projection method. Conversion to orthographic
views from given pictorial views of objects, including dimensioning – Drafting of Orthographic views
from Pictorial views.
Self-study: CAD software commands for sketching a drawing
MODULE 3: GEOMETRICAL MODELING ISOMETRIC VIEWS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES (15L)
Principles of isometric projection and solid modelling. Isometric drawing ‐ IsoPlanes and 3D Modelling
commands. Projections of Principal Views from 3‐D Models. Solid Modeling – Types of modelling ‐
62
Wire frame model, Surface Model and Solid Model – Introduction to graphic software for solid
modelling. Development of Surfaces.
Self-study: Surface modelling and solid modelling commands
MODULE 4: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING (15L)
Preparation of solid models of machine components like slide block, solid bearing block, bushed
bearing, gland, wall bracket, guide bracket, shaft bracket, jig plate, shaft support (open type), vertical
shaft support etc using appropriate modelling software.
2D views and sectional view, computer aided drafting and dimensioning. Generate 2D drawing from
the 3D models – generate and develop the lateral surfaces of the objects. Presentation Techniques
of Engineering Drawings – Title Blocks – Printing/Plotting the 2D/3D drawing using printer and
printing solid object using 3D printer.
MODULE 5: SIMPLE DESIGN PROJECTS - COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING (15L)
Creation of engineering models and their presentation in standard 2D form, 3D Wire‐Frame and
shaded solids, meshed topologies for engineering analysis, tool‐path generation for component
manufacture, geometric dimensioning and tolerancing. Use of solid‐modelling software for creating
associative models at the components and assembly levels in their respective branch of engineering
like building floor plans that include: windows, doors, fixtures such as WC, Sink, shower, slide block,
etc. Applying colour coding according to drawing practice.
TEXT BOOKS
2. Jeyapoovan T, Engineering Drawing and Graphics Using AutoCAD, 7th Edition, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
10. Introduction to AutoCAD – 2D and 3D Design, A.Yarmwood, Newnes
11. Engineering Drawing and Graphic Technology‐International Edition, Thomas E.
12. Engineering Drawing and Design, Sixth Edition, C. Jensen, J.D. Helsel, D.R.
13. Technical Drawing‐Fourteenth Edition, F. E. Giesecke, A. Mitchell, H. C.
14. Bhatt N.D and Panchal V.M, Engineering Drawing: Plane and Solid Geometry,
15. Warren J. Luzadder and Jon. M. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing,
E BOOKS
1 http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐j‐
benjamin‐pentex‐free‐ebook‐pdf‐download.html
2 http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐p‐i‐
varghese.html
MOOC
63
COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE EEB4101 COURSE CATEGORY ES L-T-P-S 2- 0- 2- 1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able
1 To understand basic operation in digital systems and instruments. 1,2,4,6
2 To gain knowledge on basic functioning of sensors and display units. 1,2,4,6
3 To familiarize the concepts of signal processing and converting elements. 1,2,4,6
4 To acquire the knowledge of microcontrollers and applications 1,2,4,6
5 To attain the basic concepts of consumer electronics and communication devices. 1,2,4,6
Prerequisites : Physics and Mathematics
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SYSTEMS (9L)
Analog& Digital signals ‐ Need for digital instruments – Elements of digital instruments – Number
systems: ‐ Binary, Hexadecimal ‐ Logic gates ‐ Boolean algebra (Identities and Properties) ‐ Digital
controllers (ON‐OFF).
Suggested Reading: Basics of number systems.
MODULE 2 –SENSORS AND DISPLAYS (9L)

Sensors and Transducers –Classification, Potentiometer, Strain Gauge, Piezoelectric Sensor, Linear
Variable Differential Transformer, Resistance temperature detectors (RTD), Thermocouples, Tactile
transducers ‐ Displays: ‐ Light Emitting Diode (including OLED) displays.
Suggested Reading: Primary sensing elements, introduction to displays.
MODULE – 3 : SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS (9L)

D.C. Bridge‐ Unbalanced, Push‐Pull configuration, Operational amplifiers‐ Inverting, Non‐Inverting,
Instrumentation Amplifier, Active filters: ‐ Low pass, High pass ‐ Analog to Digital Converter – Successive
Approximation, Digital to Analog Converter ‐ Weighted Resistor.
Suggested Reading: Basic network theorems.
MODULE – 4 :INTRODUCTION TO MICRO CONTROLLERS (9L)

Introduction: Memory types, peripheral devices‐ Microcontroller (8 bit), Architecture, Graphics
Processing Unit (GPU) ‐ Applications: ‐Interfacing of Digital Input/Output, Analogue Input/Output,
Display. Introduction to Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and PID (Proportional + Integral +
Derivative) Controller.
Suggested Reading: Hobby electronics with Microcontroller interface.
MODULE 5 – CONSUMER ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (9L)

Consumer Electronics: Television, Mobile Phones, Air conditioners, Refrigerators, Washing Machine.
(Block diagram approach only.)
Communication System: Satellite communication, Global Positioning Systems, Global System for
Mobile. (Block diagram approach only.)
Suggested Reading: Consumer Electronics User Manuals.
64

Field trip to consumer electronics industry.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Digital Fundamentals, Thomas l. Floyd, 11th edition, Pearson 2014.
2 Op‐amps and Linear Integrated Circuits,Ramakant A. Gayakwad,4th edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
3 Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, David A. Bell, Oxford University Press, 2013.
4 The 8051 Microcontroller And Embedded Systems Using Assembly And C, Sepehr Naimi, Sarmad
Naimi, Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Second edition, 2017.
5 Programmable Logic Controllers, Frank D. Petruzella, McGraw‐Hill Education, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Digital Logic and Computer Design, M. Morris Mano, Prentice‐Hall, 2016
2. Linear Integrated Circuits, Roy Choudhury, New Age International Publishers, 4th edition, 2011
3. C and 8051, Thomas W. Schultz, Thomas W. Schultz Publishers, 4th edition,2008
4. Consumer Electronics, S.P Bali, Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2008 Edition
Global Mobile Satellite Communications Applications (For Maritime, Land and Aeronautical
5.
Applications Volume 2), 2nd edition, Springer, 2018
E BOOKS
1 http://www.ee.iitm.ac.in/~giri/pdfs/EE4140/textbook.pdf
2 https://electronics.howstuffworks.com/home‐audio‐video‐channel.htm
MOOC
3 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108099/Digital%20Systems.pdf
4 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/pdf/mod2.pdf
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse‐contents/IISc‐BANG/Microprocessors
5
%20and%20Microcontrollers/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod3/M3L6.pdf
6 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063/pdf/L‐09(SS)(IA&C)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse‐contents/IIT‐KANPUR/microcontrollers/micro
7
/ui/Course_home2_5.html
65
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CREDIT 3

COURSE CODE CSB4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 2- 0- 2 -1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
Appreciate the different elements involved in good designs and to apply them in
1. 1,2,5,12
practice when called for.
Be aware of the product oriented and user‐oriented aspects that make the 1,2,5,12
2.
design a success.
Think of innovative designs incorporating different segments of knowledge 1,2,5,12
3
gained in the course
Have a broader perspective of design covering function, cost, environmental 1,2,5,12
4.
sensitivity, safety and other factors other than engineering analysis.
5. Learn economic and environmental Issues, trade aspects and IPR 1,2,5,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ENGINEERING DESIGN (7L+2P)
Design and its objectives; Design constraints, Design functions, Design means and Design from; Role
of Science, Engineering and Technology in design; Engineering as a business proposition; Functional
and Strength Designs. Design form, function and strength; How to initiate creative designs? Initiating
the thinking process for designing a product of daily use. Need identification; Problem Statement;
Market survey‐customer requirements; Design attributes and objectives; Ideation; Brain storming
approaches; arriving at solutions; Closing on to the Design needs.
Project: An Exercise in the process of design initiation. A simple problem is to be taken up to examine
different solutions‐ Ceiling fan, Group Presentation and discussion.
MODULE 2: PROCESSES IN DESIGN FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING (7L+2P)
Design process‐ Different stages in design and their significance; Defining the design space; Analogies
and “thinking outside of the box”; Quality function deployment‐meeting what the customer wants;
Evaluation and choosing of a design. Design Communication; Realization of the concept into a
configuration, drawing and model. Concept of “Complex is Simple”. Design for function and strength.
Design detailing‐ Material selection, Design visualization‐ Solid modelling; Detailed 2D drawings;
Tolerance; Use of standard items in design; Research needs in design; Energy needs of the design,
both in its realization and in the applications.
Project: An exercise in the detailed design of any architecture.
MODULE 3: PROTOTYPING IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING DESIGN (4L+5P)

Prototyping‐ rapid prototyping; testing and evaluation of design; Design modifications; Freezing the
design; Cost analysis.
Engineering the design – From prototype to product. Planning; Scheduling; Supply chains; inventory;
handling; manufacturing/construction operations; storage; packaging; shipping; marketing; feed‐back
on design
Project: List out the standards organizations. Prepare a list of standard items used in any CSE
specialization. Develop any design with over 50% standard items as parts.
66
MODULE 4: QUALITY ASPECTS IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING DESIGN (4L+5P)

Design for “X”; covering quality, reliability, safety, manufacturing/construction, assembly,
maintenance, logistics, handling; disassembly; recycling; re‐engineering etc.
Project: Example: List out the design methods for cloud based structure.
MODULE 5: USER CENTRED DESIGNS IN COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING (4L+5P)
Product centered and user centered design. Product centered attributes and user centered attributes.
Bringing the two closer. Example: Smart phone. Aesthetics and ergonomics. Value engineering,
Concurrent engineering, Reverse engineering in design; Culture based design; Architectural designs;
Motifs and cultural background; Tradition and design; Study the evolution of Software Designs; Role of
colours in design.Design as a marketing tool; Intellectual Property rights – Trade secret; patent; copy‐
right; trademarks; product liability. Group presentation of any such products covering all aspects that
could make or mar it.
Project: Examine the possibility of value addition for an existing product.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Balmer, R. T., Keat, W. D., Wise, G., and Kosky, P., Exploring Engineering, Third Edition: An
1. Introduction to Engineering and Design ‐ [Part 3 ‐ Chapters 17 to 27], ISBN13: 978‐0124158917
ISBN‐10: 0124158919
2. Dym, C. L., Little, P. and Orwin, E. J., Engineering Design ‐ A Project based introduction ‐ Wiley,
ISBN‐978‐1‐118‐32458‐5
3. Eastman, C. M. (Ed.), Design for X Concurrent engineering imperatives, 1996, XI, 489 p. ISBN 978‐
94‐011‐3985‐4 Springer
4. Haik, Y. And Shahin, M. T., Engineering Design Process, Cengage Learning, ISBN‐13: 978‐0‐495‐
66816‐9
5. Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J. and Grote, K. H., Engineering Design: A Systematic
Approach, 3rd ed. 2007, XXI, 617p., ISBN 978‐1‐84628‐319‐2
6. Voland, G., Engineering by Design, ISBN 978‐93‐325‐3505‐3, Pearson India
67
SUSTAINABLE ENGINEERING SYSTEMS

COURSE CODE GEA4102 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Learn the principles of sustainability with case studies. 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
2. Understand assessing technologies and their impact on environment. 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
Learn the concept of Green Engineering and to apply in their projects at 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
3
higher semesters.
4. Manage natural resources and waste from various types of industries. 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
5. Learn water technology and behavioral aspects of humans. 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
MODULE 1: PRINCIPLES OF SUSTAINABLE SYSTEMS (5L)
Sustainability Definitions ‐ Principles of Sustainable Design, Sustainable Engineering ‐Frameworks for
Applying Sustainability Principles ‐ Summary & Activities.
MODULE 2: TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT AND LIFECYCLE ASSESSMENT (5L)
Technology as a part of anthropogenic environment ‐ Technology readiness levels (TRL) – technical
metrics ‐ Emerging, converging, disruptive technologies ‐ Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) methodology ‐
Summary & Activities.
MODULE 3: GREEN ENGINEERING (5L)
Principles of Green Engineering ‐ Frameworks for assessment of alternatives ‐ Green Engineering
examples ‐ Multifunctional Materials and Their Impact on Sustainability ‐ Summary & Activities.
MODULE 4: RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES (5L)

Waste management purpose and strategies ‐ Recycling: open‐loop versus closed‐loop thinking ‐
Recycling efficiency ‐ Management of food waste and composting technologies ‐ E‐waste
stream management ‐ Reuse and redistribution programs ‐ LCA approach to waste management
systems ‐ Summary and Activities.
MODULE 5: SUSTAINABLE WATER AND WASTEWATER SYSTEMS (5L)

Water cycle ‐ Water conservation and protection technologies ‐ Water treatment systems Metrics for
assessment of water management technologies‐Summary & Activities.
MODULE 6 - BEHAVIORAL ASPECTS AND FEEDBACKS (5L)

Collaborative Decision Making ‐ Role of Community and Social Networking ‐ Human Factor in
Sustainability Paradigm ‐ Summary & Activities.
68
TEXT BOOKS
1. Vanek, F.M., and L.D. Albright, Energy Systems Engineering. Evaluation and Implementation,
McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. C.U. Becker, Sustainability Ethics and Sustainability Research, Springer 2012.
3. J.B. Guinee et al., Life Cycle Assessment: Past, Present, and Future, Environ. Sci. Technol., 2011,
45, 90‐96.
4. Anastas, P.T., Zimmerman, J.B., Innovations in Green Chemistry and Green Engineering,
Springer 2013.
5. Solid Waste Technology & Management, Volume 1 & 2, Christensen, T., Ed., Wiley and Sons.,
2010.
6. Sterman, J.D., in Sustainability Science: The Emerging Paradigm, Weinstein, M.P. and Turner,
R.E. (Eds.), Springer Science+Business Media, LLC 2012.
E BOOKS
David T. Allen, David R. Shonnard, Sustainable Engineering Concepts, Design and Case
1.
Studies, Pearson Education, December 2011. (ISBN: 9780132756587)
Gerald Jonker Jan Harmsen, Engineering for Sustainability 1st Edition, A Practical Guide for
2.
Sustainable Design, Elsvier 2012. (ISBN: 9780444538475).
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/sustainability
2. https://www.academiccourses.com/Certificate/Sustainability‐Studies/India/
3. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ce08/preview
4. https://www.coursera.org/learn/ecosystem‐services
69
COURSE TITLE DATA STRUCTURES USING C CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSB4117 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
Outline the importance of data structures and find computational
1. 1,2,4,12
complexity for solving any problem.
Choose and implement appropriate linear data structure for solving
2. 1,2,3,12
computing problems
3. Apply appropriate non‐linear data structures for given problems 1,2,3,12
Implement operations like insertion, deletion, traversing mechanism, searching,
4. 1,2,3,12
etc. on various data structures
5. Analyze and implement various sorting and searching algorithms. 1,2,3,12
6. Analyze and implement hashing techniques and disjoint sets. 1,2,3,12
Prerequisites: C Programming Language
MODULE 1: LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (9L)
Introduction to Data Structures – Fundamental Elements – Asymptotic Notations: Big‐Oh, Omega and
Theta – Best, Worst and Average case Analysis: Definition and an example ‐Arrays and its
representations – Stacks and Queues – Linked lists ‐ Singly Linked List ‐ Doubly linked list ‐ Linked list‐
based implementation of Stacks and Queues – Evaluation of Expressions.
MODULE 2: NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES (9L)
Trees: Introduction to Trees – Basic concepts ‐ Binary Trees – Binary tree representations (Array and
list) and Traversals Techniques (Preorder, Inorder, Postorder) – Succinct Data Structures: Overview –
Level order representation of Binary Trees – Rank and Select – Subtrees.
Graphs: Definitions, Terminologies, Matrix and Adjacency List Representation Of Graphs, Elementary
Graph operations, Traversal methods: Breadth First Search and Depth First Search.
MODULE 3: SEARCH TREE STRUCTURES AND PRIORITY QUEUES (9L)
Binary Search Trees – AVL Trees – Splay Trees ‐ Fusion Data Structures: Sketching‐ Approximating the
sketch ‐ Parallel comparison – Desk etching – Application of Fusion Tree Structures ‐ Priority Queues –
Heaps implementations – Binary Heap.
MODULE 4: SORTING AND SEARCHING (9L)
Sorting Algorithms: Basic concepts ‐ Bubble Sort ‐ Insertion Sort ‐ Selection Sort ‐ Quick Sort – Shell sort
‐ Heap Sort ‐ Merge Sort ‐ External Sorting.
Searching: Linear Search, Binary Search.
MODULE 5: INDEXING AND DISJOINT SETS (9L)
Indexing: Hashing ‐ Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open Addressing: Linear Probing‐ Quadratic
Probing‐ Double Hashing‐ Rehashing – Extendible Hashing.
Disjoint Sets: Basic data structure ‐ Smart Union Algorithms ‐ Path Compression.
70
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ellis Horowitz, S. Sahni, Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”,2nd edition,2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tanenbaum, ―Data Structures using C, Pearson
1.
Education Asia, 2004.
E BOOKS
https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/54eb/d5fbd450c745ffb1a5a126d975aa0a53c2e1.pdf
1.
(Succinct Data Structures)
2. https://courses.csail.mit.edu/6.851/spring12/scribe/lec12.pdf (Fusion Data Structures)
3. http://lib.mdp.ac.id/ebook/Karya%20Umum/Dsa.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/data‐structures
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064/
3. https://www.udemy.com/algorithm/
COURSE TITLE OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING C++ CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE CSB4118 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3- 0- 2- 1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
1. Write basic programs using C++ 1,2,3,12
2. Identify and implement the basic concepts of Object‐Oriented 1,2,3,12
programming.
3. Use appropriate functions, constructors and overloading mechanisms to 1,2,3,4,5,12
develop applications.
4. Implement Inheritance and Runtime Polymorphism for building re‐usable code. 1,2,3,4,5,12
5. Demonstrate exception handling, streaming and file handling mechanisms 1,2,3,4,5,12
6. Implement algorithms using templates and Standard Template Library (STL) 1,2,3,4,5,12
MODULE 1 - INTRODUCTION TO C++ and OOP (9L+6P)
Object‐Oriented Paradigm – Features of Object Oriented Programming – C++ Fundamentals – Variables
‐ Data types – Operators ‐ Arrays ‐ Strings – Default arguments ‐Inline Functions, Reference Variables
and Pointers, Dynamic Memory Management.
Introduction to C++ classes –Class Objects‐ Access Specifiers –Accessing Class Members‐ Defining
Member functions–Arrays of Objects ‐ Objects as Arguments.
(i) Implementation of basic C++ programs.
71
(ii) Class implementation.

(iii) Implementation of array of objects.
Suggested reading: Classes and Objects - http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105151/20
MODULE 2 - FUNCTIONS AND COMPILE-TIME POLYMORPHISM (9L+ 6P)
Working with Friend functions and Friend Classes – Static Data and Member Functions ‐Constructors ‐
Parameterized Constructors ‐ Constructors with Default Arguments‐ Copy Constructors‐ Constructor
overloading‐ Destructors.
Polymorphism‐ Types of Polymorphism – Compile time and Runtime ‐ Function Overloading ‐ Rules of
Operator Overloading‐ Overloading of Binary and Unary Operators as Member function/Friend
function.
(i) Implementation of friend and static functions.
(ii) Implementation of Parameterized Constructors and Destructors.
(iii) Operator Overloading using Member and Friend functions.
Suggested reading: Operator Overloading - http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105151/15
MODULE 3 -INHERITANCE AND RUN TIME POLYMORPHISM (9L + 6P)
Inheritance‐ Types of Inheritance – Single, Multilevel, Hierarchical, Multiple, Hybrid, Multipath and
Virtual base class ‐ Accessing Overridden Function ‐ Constructors and Destructors in derived classes.
Understanding Runtime polymorphism ‐ Memory Management operators, Pointers to objects, Virtual
Functions (concept of VTABLE), pure virtual functions, Abstract Class.
(i) Implementation of inheritance types.
(ii) Implementation of constructors and destructors in derived classes.
(iii) Implementation of virtual functions.
Suggested reading: Dynamic Binding ‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105151/41
MODULE 4 - EXCEPTION HANDLING, STREAMS AND FILES (9L + 6P)
Understanding of working and implementation of Exception Handling.
Streams‐ Unformatted and formatted console I/O operations – Manipulators, User‐Defined
Manipulators ‐ Implementation of Files, Writing and Reading Objects.
(i) Implementation of Exception Handling.
(ii) Implementation of console I/O operations.
(iii) File Manipulations.
Suggested reading: Exceptions - http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105151/52
MODULE 5 – TEMPLATES AND STANDARD TEMPLATE LIBRARY (9L + 6P)
Generic Programming with Templates ‐ Function Templates‐ Function Templates with Multiple
Arguments ‐ Overloaded Function Templates ‐ Class Templates ‐ Class Templates with Multiple
Arguments.
72
Standard Template Library (STL) – Components of Standard Template Library ‐ Containers, Algorithms
and Iterators ‐Implementation of Sequence and Associative containers for different Algorithms using
Iterator.
(i) Implementation of Function and Class Templates.
(ii) Implementation of Algorithms using STL.
Suggested reading: Templates - http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105151/54
TEXT BOOKS
1. K.R.Venugopal, RajkumarBuyya , “Mastering C++”,2nd Edition , McGraw Hill Education,2017
2. Herbert Schildt, “C++: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Education,2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bjarne Stroustrup,“The C++ Programming Language”,4th Edition, Addison‐Wesley
1.
Professional,2013.
Nell Dale, Chips Weems, “Programming and Problem Solving with C++”, Jones and Bartlett
2.
Learning, 5th Edition, 2009.
Nicolai M. Josuttis, “The C++ Standard Library: A Tutorial and Reference”,2nd Edition, Addison
3.
Wesley,2012.
E BOOKS
1. http://fac.ksu.edu.sa/sites/default/files/ObjectOrientedProgramminginC4thEdition.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐c‐microsoft‐dev210x‐5
2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/c‐plus‐plus‐a#syllabus
73
COURSE TITLE DATA STRUCTURES LAB CREDITS 1

CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Implement linear data structures using C. 1,2,3
2. Implement various sorting techniques using C. 1,2,3
3. Implement various search techniques using C. 1,2,3
4. Implement non‐linear data structures using C. 1,2,3
5. Implement Graph concepts in C. 1,2,3
Prerequisite: C Programming Language
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Implement infix to postfix conversion and evaluation of postfix using stack in C.
2. Implement dynamic memory allocation using circular queue in C.
3. Implement the following sorting operations in C
(a) Shell Sort (b) Heap Sort (c) Merge Sort (d) Quick Sort
4. Implement the following search operations in C
(a) Linear Search (b) Binary search using recursion (c) Hash Search.
5. Implement Tree traversal on the given expression tree in C.
6. Implement Binary search Tree with its primitive operations.
7. Implement AVL tree and perform insertion, deletion and search operations.
8. Construct a min heap and perform insertion, deletion and find min operations.
9. Implement the algorithm for construction of Minimum spanning Tree (Prim’s & Kruskal) in C.
10. Implement Dijkstra’s algorithm to find out the shortest path of the given graph in C.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ellis Horowitz, S. Sahni, Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”,2nd edition,2015.
2. Y. Langsam, M. J. Augenstein and A. M. Tanenbaum, ―Data Structures using C, Pearson
74
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB CREDIT 0.5

COURSE CODE GEA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-2
CIA 80% ESE 20%
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to Identify
1 and use of tools, Types of joints used in welding, carpentry and plumbing 1,2,4,6,12
operations.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques such as carpentry and
2 1,2,4,6,12
plumbing practices.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques of different types of
3 1,2,4,6,12
welding and basic machining practices.
SLOT X - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP
5. Welding: Arc welding: Butt joints
6. Lap joints.
7. Machining: Facing
8. Turning
II. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
5. Dismantling and Studying of two stroke gasoline engine.
6. Assembling of two stroke gasoline engine.
7. Dismantling and Studying of four stroke gasoline engine
8. Assembling of four stroke gasoline engine.
III. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
5. Study of Flow Pattern around Various Objects.
6. Force measurement on Aircraft Model
7. Determination of Young's Modulus for Aluminum Cantilever Beam
8. Binary Addition & Subtraction using Microprocessor
IV. CIVIL ENGINEERING
5. Plumbing‐ Basic Pipe Connection using valves, couplings and elbows.
6. Carpentry – Sowing, Planning and making common Joints.
7. Bar Bending
8. Construction of a 50 cm height brick wall without mortar using English Bond.
SLOT Y - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
V.ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
5. Study of tools and accessories.
6. Study of cables.
7. Staircase wiring, Tube light and Fan connection.
8. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
VI. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
5. Study of Active and Passive Components.
6. Study of Logic Circuits.
7. Making simple circuit using Electronic Components.
8. Measuring of parameters for signal using CRO.
75
VII. COMPUTER SCIENCE

5. Troubleshooting different parts of the computer peripherals, Monitor, Keyboard & CPU.
6. Installation of various operating systems, their capabilities, Windows, Unix, Linux.
7. Installation of commonly used software like MS Office
8. Assembling digital computer.
VIII. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
5. Study of Key Elements of Mechatronics Systems
6. Sensors – Load Cell, Thermocouple
7. Actuators – Linear & Rotary Actuators
8. Interfacing & Measurements – Virtual Instrumentation
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jeyapoovan T and Saravanapandian M., Engineering practices lab manual, 4th Edition, Vikas
publishing House, New Delhi, 2015.
2 Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
3 Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011
4 Robert Quesada, Jeyapoovan T., Computer Numerical Control Machining and Turning Centers,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006
METHOD OF ALLOCATION FOR ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB
SLOT X : MECH, AERO, AUTO, CIVIL EXPERIMENTS
SLOT Y : EEE, ELECTRONICS, CSE, MECHATRONICS EXPERIMENTS
 EVERY CLASS OF
 GROUP A (AERO, AUTO, MECH, MCT, CHEM, BIO, CIVIL
 GROUP B (CSE, IT, ECE, EEE, AEROSPACE)
GETS DIVIDED INTO 4 SUB ‐ GROUPS NAMELY a, b, c, d ‐‐ EACH CONSISTING OF 15 TO 20 STUDENTS
MAX.
 FOR EXAMPLE: GROUP A STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT X
 a – MECH; b – AUTO; c – AERO ; d – CIVIL
 b – MECH; c – AUTO; d – AERO ; a – CIVIL
 GROUP B STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT Y
 a – EEE; b – ECE; c – CSE ; d – MCT
 b – EEE; c – ECE; d – CSE ; a – MCT
76
ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY

COURSE TITLE CREDIT 1
(Common to all engineering branches)
CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Analyze material’s elastic properties. 1,2,3,4
2. Determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor. 1,2,3,4
3. Measure coefficient of viscosity of liquids. 1,2,3,4
4. Determine wavelength of laser. 1,2,3,4
5. Describe V‐I characteristics of diode. 1,2,3,4
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic physics practical at higher secondary level.
List of Experiments (Any Five Experiments)
1. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of the material of a wire.
2. Non‐Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
3. Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
4. Viscosity – Determination of co‐efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s flow.
5. Lee’s Disc – Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
6. Air – Wedge – Determination of thickness of a thin wire
7. Spectrometer – refractive index of a prism
8. Semiconductor laser – Determination of wavelength of laser using grating
9. Semiconductor diode – VI characteristics
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Chemical Kinetics with MATLAB
2. StoichTools with MATLAB : Tools for Doing Stoichiometry
3. plot Hydrogen Atom Molecular Orbital using MATLAB.
4. Processing of chromatography data in the MATLAB programming
5. Atomistic Topology Operations in Matlab
TEXT BOOK
1. P. Mani, engineering Physics Practicals, Dhanam Publications, Chennai, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Glenn V.Lo, Jesus Urrechaga ‐ Aituna, Introductory Physics Laboratory Manual, Part‐I, Fall 2005
Edition.
2. P. Kulkarni, Experiments in Engineering Physics Bachelor of Engineering and Technology, Edition
2015
E BOOK
1. http://www.aurora.ac.in/images/pdf/departments/humanities‐and‐sciences/engg‐phy‐lab‐
manual.pdf
77
MATERIALS CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Characterize basic properties of refractory ceramics 1,2,4,6
2. Prepare resins and composites. 1,2,4,6
3. Estimate metal ions present in samples using instrumental techniques. 1,2,4,6
4. Develop adsorption isotherm. 1,2,4,6
5. Find properties of lubricants and other oil samples. 1,2,4,6
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic chemistry practical at higher secondary level.
1. Construction of Phenol‐Water Phase diagram.
2. Determination of viscosity of polymer using Ostwald Viscometer.
3. Preparation of urea‐formaldehyde resin.
4. Determination of porosity of a refractory.
5. Determination of Apparent Density of porous solids.
6. Determination of Viscosity Index of lubricants.
7. Estimation of dye content in the effluent by UV‐Visible spectrophotometry.
8. Determination of viscosity of oil using Red‐Wood Viscometer.
9. Determination of Copper / iron content in the alloy by colorimetry.
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium ions by Flame Photometry.
11. Verification of Beer‐Lambert’s law using gold nanoparticles.
12. Determination of adsorption isotherm for acetic acid on activated charcoal.
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Display and manipulate 3‐D molecule structure
2. Implement an example for dose‐response fitting
3. Learn Differential Equations with MATLAB.
4. Acquire and plot angular velocity and orientation data
5. Plot and Visualize Categorical Data
REFERENCE BOOKS
J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J.D. Barnes and N.J.K. Thomas, Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative
1.
Chemical Analysis, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8th edition, McGraw
2.
Hill, London, 2008
3. S. Sumathi, Laboratory work book for Engineering Chemistry Practical, 2015
Laboratory Manual of Testing Materials, William Kendrick Hatt and Herbert Henry Scofield,
4.
Andesite Press, 2017
E BOOKS
1. http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐book.html
MOOC
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/chemistry/5‐111‐principles‐of‐chemical‐science‐fall‐
1
2008/video‐lectures/lecture‐32/
2 https://www.coursetalk.com/providers/coursera/courses/introduction‐to‐chemistry‐1
78
SEMESTER III
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS
(Common For all Departments)
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Formulate and solve some of the physical problems involving partial differential 1,2,3,4
equations
2 Classify and solve the Wave and Heat equations 1,2,3,4
3 Classify and solve two‐dimensional heat equations. 1,2,3,4
4 Solve problems related to engineering applications by using Fourier Transform 1,2,3,4
techniques.
5 Understand the discrete transform applied to engineering problems. 1,2,3,4
MODULE 1: PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9L+3T)

Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants, arbitrary functions –
Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations – Lagrange’s linear equation –
Linear partial differential equations of second order with constant coefficients.
Suggested Reading: Partial Differentiation
MODULE 2: ONE DIMENSIONAL WAVE AND HEAT FLOW EQUATION (9L+3T)

Classification of second order linear partial differential equations – Solutions of one dimensional wave
equation (without proof) – One dimensional heat flow equation (without proof) and application in
string and rod problems.
Suggested Reading: Partial Differential Equations, Half range sine series.
MODULE 3: TWO DIMENSIONAL HEAT FLOW EQUATION (9L+3T)

Steady state solution of two‐dimensional heat equations and applications in finite plates and infinite
plates problems.
Suggested Reading: Partial Differential Equations, Half range sine series.
MODULE 4: FOURIER TRANSFORM (9L+3T)

Fourier Integral Theorem (without proof) – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms –
Properties – Transforms of Simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.
Suggested Reading: Basic integration.
79
MODULE 5: Z-TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS (9L+3T)

Z‐Transform – Elementary Properties – Inverse Z‐Transform – Convolution theorem – Formation of
Difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z‐Transform
Suggested Reading: Basic calculus
LAB/MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

Theory only
TEXT BOOKS
1. P. Sivarama Krishna Das, C. Vijayakumari., “Transforms and partial differential equations”,
Pearson Publication, 2016.
2. Grewal. B.S., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 42nd Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2012.
3. Chandrasekaran A, “A Text Book of Transforms and Partial Differential Equations”, Dhanam
Publication, 2015
4. Raj Kumar Bansal,Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its Applications in
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd , 2007.
2. Datta.K.B., "Mathematical Methods of Science and Engineering", Cengage Learning India Pvt
Ltd, Delhi, 2013.
3. Veerarajan. T., "Transforms and Partial Differential Equations", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, Second reprint, 2012.
2013.
E BOOKS
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/laplace‐transforms
2. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐differential‐equations‐bux‐math226‐1x‐1
80
COURSE TITLE DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS CREDITS 4

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1. Explain the asymptotic performance of algorithms. 1,2,3
2. Implement sorting and searching algorithm 1,2,3,10,11
3. Apply the Algorithms on graphs for real word problem. 1,2,3,10,11
4. Analyse the algorithm design techniques: divide and conquer, greedy technique. 1,2,3,10,11
5. Design an efficient algorithm for NP hard problems 1,2,3,10,11
Prerequisites: C Programming and Data Structures
MODULE 1: ASYMPTOTIC COMPLEXITY AND ASYMPTOTIC NOTATION (9L+6P)
Introduction and motivation‐Input size, worst case, average case. Quantitate efficiency Big O, Big
omega and Big theta‐Basic Efficiency classes.
Calculate complexity of algorithms using step count method.
Suggested reading :https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs20
MODULE 2: SORTING AND SEARCH (9L+6P)
Introduction‐Searching and sorting ‐Selection sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort‐Analysis, Quick sort,
Quick sort –analysis.
Analyse and compare the sorting Algorithms.
Suggested reading :https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/
MODULE 3: ALGORITHMS ON GRAPHS (9L+6P)
Representing Graphs‐Breadth First Search (BFS)‐Depth First Search (DFS)‐Applications of BFS and DFS‐
Single source shortest‐path‐Dijkstras algorithm‐All pair shortest‐path algorithm‐ Floyd’s and Warshall’s
algorithm ‐Minimum cost spanning tree Prims algorithm‐and Kruskal’s algorithm.
Analyse the time complexity of the algorithms using graphs.
MODULE 4: DESIGN TECHNIQUES: DIVIDE AND CONQUER, GREEDY (9L+6P)

Divide and conquer‐Closest pair of points, Search trees‐ Binary search tree, Balanced search trees ,
Greedy technique‐Interval scheduling, Scheduling with deadlines:minimizing lateness, Huffman codes.
Calculate the complexity of algorithms using divide and conquer, dynamic programming, greedy
technique and backtracking.
81
MODULE 5: INTRACTABILITY AND PRAM (9L+6P)

Intractability: NP completeness‐Approximation algorithms for NP‐hard problems – Traveling salesman
problem – Knapsack problem. PRAM ALGORITHMS‐Introduction, Computational Model, Parallel
Algorithms for Prefix Computation, List Ranking, and Graph Problems.
Analyse the complexity of NP hard problems
Suggested reading:
http://www.utdallas.edu/~dzdu/cs6363/unit5.pdf
https://www.edutechlearners.com/design‐analysis‐algorithms
TEXT BOOKS
1. Thomas H.Cormen, Charles E.Leiserson, Ronald L. Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction
to Algorithms”, Third Edition, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms”,Third Edition, Pearson
Education,2012
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”,
Pearson Education, Reprint 2006.
3. Donald E. Knuth, “The Art of Computer Programming”, Volumes 1&3 Pearson Education,
2009. Steven S. Skiena, “The Algorithm Design Manual”, Second Edition, Springer, 2008.
COURSE TITLE DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSB4202 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3- 0-0- 1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Recall the basic concepts of database systems. 1,2,12
2. Identify the SQL queries for a given scenario. 1,2,4,12
3. Illustrate relational database theory, and be able to write relational algebra 1,2,3,4,12
expressions for queries.
4. Summarize the various data storage devices and types of indexes. 1,2,12
5. Demonstrate transaction processing and concurrency control. 1,2,4,12
6. Explain Object oriented dB, Distributed dB, XML, data warehousing and Mobile 1,2,12
database.
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION AND CONCEPTUAL MODELING (9L + 6P)
Introduction to File and Database systems‐ Database system structure – Data Models – Introduction
to Network and Hierarchical Models – ER model – Relational Model – Relational Algebra and Calculus.
Suggested reading :http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106093/1
82
MODULE 2: RELATIONAL MODEL (9L + 6P)

SQL – Data definition‐ Queries in SQL‐ Updates‐ Views – Integrity and Security – Relational Database
design – Functional dependencies and Normalization for Relational Databases (up to BCNF).
MODULE 3: DATA STORAGE AND QUERY PROCESSING (9L + 6P)
Record storage and Primary file organization‐ Secondary storage Devices‐ Operations on Files‐ Heap
File‐ Sorted Files‐ Hashing Techniques – Index Structure for files –Different types of Indexes‐ B‐Tree ‐
B+Tree – Query Processing.
Suggested reading : http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106093/11
MODULE 4: TRANSACTION MANAGEMENT (9L + 6P)
Transaction Processing – Introduction‐ Need for Concurrency control‐ Desirable properties of
Transaction‐ Schedule and Recoverability‐ Serializability and Schedules – Concurrency Control – Types
of Locks‐ Two Phases locking‐ Deadlock‐ Time stamp based concurrency control – Recovery Techniques
– Concepts‐ Immediate Update‐ Deferred Update ‐ Shadow Paging.
MODULE 5: CURRENT TRENDS (9L + 6P)
Object Oriented Databases – Need for Complex Data types‐ OO data Model‐ Nested relations‐ Complex
Types‐ Inheritance Reference Types ‐ Distributed databases‐ Homogenous and Heterogenous‐
Distributed data Storage – XML – Structure of XML‐ Data‐ XML Document‐ Schema‐ Querying and
Transformation. – Data Mining and Data Warehousing and Mobile Database
TEXT BOOKS
1 Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth and S. Sudarshan‐ ―Database System Concepts‖, Sixth
Edition, McGraw‐Hill, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ramez Elmasri and Shamkant B. Navathe, ―Fundamental Database Systems‖, Seventh Edi on,
Pearson Education,2016.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, ―Database Management System, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company,
Third Edition, 2014.
3. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, Jian Pei ‐Data Mining Concepts and Techniques, Morgan
Kaufmann, Third Edition, 2012.
E BOOKS
1. https://inspirit.net.in/books/database/Database%20System%20Concepts.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.udemy.com/database‐management‐system/
2. https://www.edx.org/course/database‐systems‐concepts‐design‐gtx‐cs6400x‐1
83
COURSE TITLE JAVA PROGRAMMING CREDITS 4

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1. Write basic programs in Java 1,2,3,12
2. Identify and implement the basic concepts of Object‐Oriented programming. 1,2,3,12
3. Create and implement packages and interfaces in Java. 1,2,3,4,5,12
4. Demonstrate user defined, inbuilt exceptions and multi‐threaded concepts in 1,2,3,4,5,12
Java stream classes.
5. Identify and use all types of Character and Byte Streams 1,2,3,4,5,12
6. Create GUI based trivial applications 1,2,3,4,5,12
Prerequisites: C and C++ Programming Language
MODULE 1 - INTRODUCTION TO JAVA and OOP (9L+6P)
Object‐Oriented Languages: Introduction to Java ‐ Importance of Java for the Internet ‐ Byte‐code and
its Features, Object‐Oriented Programming in Java, Java Program Structure and Java Class Library ‐
Data Types ‐ Variables and Operators ‐ Operator Precedence ‐ Selection Statements ‐ Iterative
Statement, Defining Classes & Methods – Constructors ‐ Creating Objects of a Class ‐ Assigning object
Reference Variables ‐ ‘this’ Keyword ‐ Automatic Garbage Collection.
Arrays: Declaration and usage of Arrays ‐ Arrays of Characters, String: String as a class ‐ String Handling
Using String Class ‐ Operations on String.
1. a) Write a program to print the individual digits of any 3‐digit number.
b) Write a program to read N numbers and find the largest and smallest numbers.
2. Write a program to read an email as input and verify whether the email is in the correct format
(***@***.**) using String functions
3. Write a program to display total marks of 5 students using student class. Given the following
attributes: Regno(int), Name(string), Marks in subjects(Integer Array), Total (int).
MODULE 2 – INHERITANCE, PACKAGES AND INTERFACE (9L+ 6P)
Inheritance ‐ Inheriting Classes‐ Type of Inheritance, Polymorphism ‐ Overloading – Over riding,
Abstract Classes ‐ Access Modifier: Final.
Package ‐ Understanding Packages ‐ Defining a package ‐ Packaging up multiple classes ‐ Importing
and Using Packages ‐ Understanding CLASSPATH ‐ Standard Packages ‐ Access Protection in Packages,
Scope of Variable ‐ Access specifiers ‐ Using Inbuilt packages.
Interfaces ‐ Declaring Interfaces ‐ Implementing Interfaces ‐ Using inbuilt interfaces.
1. Write a program to create a player class. Inherit the classes Cricket_player, Football_player and
Hockey_player form player class.
2. Write a program to show how a class implements two interfaces.
3. Write a program to create a package for Book details giving Book Name, Author Name, Price,
year of publishing
84
MODULE 3 - EXCEPTION HANDLING AND MULTITHREADING (9L + 6P)

Exception Handling ‐ The concept of Exceptions in Java ‐ Types of Exceptions ‐ Exception Objects ‐ Try ‐
Catch and Finally blocks ‐ Multiple Catch blocks ‐ Understanding ‘Throws’ and ‘Throw‘ ‐ Defining Your
Own Exceptions.
Multithreading Programming ‐ The Java Thread Model, Understanding Threads ‐ The Main Thread ‐
Creating a Thread ‐ Creating Multiple Threads ‐ Thread Priorities – Synchronization ‐ Inter thread
communication ‐ Deadlocks.
1. Write a Java program to catch more than one exception.
2. Write a Java program for generating two threads, one for printing even umbers and other for
printing odd numbers.
3. Write a Java program for producer and consumer problem using Thread.
MODULE 4 – INPUT/OUTPUT STREAMS AND FILE OPERATIONS (9L + 6P)
Input/Output in Java ‐ I/O Basic ‐ Byte Streams ‐ Character Streams‐ Stream Chaining – Reading and
writing to Console ‐ Reading and Writing on Files ‐ Special Streams – InputStreamReader and
OutputStreamWriter – PushbackInputStreams.
1. Write a java program to copy the contents of one file to another file.
2. Write a Java program to read input from the standard input and write to a byte array.
MODULE 5 – WORKING WITH APPLET, AWT CLASSES, SWING AND GRAPHICS (9L + 6P)
Applet Basics ‐ Applet Architecture ‐ Applet Life Cycle ‐ Paint and Repaint methods, AWT Classes‐ AWT
Controls – Event Handling – Adapter Classes, Swing – Swing Components, Working with Graphics and
Texts ‐ Working with Colours and Font.
1. Create an Applet to read the RGB components as input and create an appropriate colour using
the RGB values. Fill a rectangle using the obtained colour.
2. Create an applet for simple calculator to perform Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and
Division using Button, label and Text field classes
TEXT BOOKS
1. Herbert Schildt, “JAVA The Complete Reference”, 10th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
2. Cay S. Horstman and Gary Cornell,“Core Java Volume I—Fundamentals”, 11th Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2018.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Cay Horstman, “Big Java: Early Objects”, 6th Edition, Wiley Publications, 2016.
Ken Arnold, James Gosling, and David Holmes, “The Java Programming Language”, 4th edition,
2.
Addison‐Wesley, 2005.
E BOOKS
https://zimslifeintcs.files.wordpress.com/2011/12/java‐2‐the‐complete‐reference‐5th‐ed‐
1.
herbert‐schildt.pdf
MOOC
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_cs07/
https://www.coursera.org/learn/java‐programming
2.
https://www.coursera.org/specializations/object‐oriented‐programming
85
COURSE TITLE PYTHON PROGRAMMING LAB CREDITS 1

CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Recall and execute basic syntax and programs in Python. 1,2,3,12
2. Implement programs using Python built‐in data types. 1,2,3,4,5,12
3. Implement user‐defined functions and modules. 1,2,3,4,5,12
4. Implement exception and file handling operations. 1,2,3,4,5,12
5. Implement OOP concepts in Python. 1,2,3,4,5,12
1. Basic Python programs by reading input from console.
2. Simple Python programs using the Decision statements.
3. Simple Python programs using Looping and Loop Control statements.
4. Programs for math operations and random number generation.
5. Basic programs using the following Python built‐in data types‐ String, List, Tuple, Set and
Dictionary.
6. Matrix operations using Nested List.
7. Programs using user‐defined functions with different types of function arguments.
8. Python programs using Time and Calendar related functions.
9. Creating packages and importing modules from packages.
10. Python programs for File manipulations.
11. Exception Handling and creating user‐defined Exceptions.
12. Basic Python programs for Class declaration and Object creation.
13. Python programs using inheritance.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Y. Daniel Liang, “Introduction to Programming using Python”, Pearson,2012.
2. Wesley J. Chun, “Core Python Programming”, Prentice Hall,2006.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.cs.uky.edu/~keen/115/Haltermanpythonbook.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/learn/python
2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/python
86
COURSE TITLE DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LAB CREDITS 1

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Populate and query a database using SQL commands. 1,2
2 Declare and enforce integrity constraints on a database using a state‐of‐ 1,2,3
the‐art RDBMS
3 Implementing Indexing on table. 1,2,3
4 Programming PL/SQL including stored procedures, stored functions, cursors, 1,2,3
packages
5 Solve basic issues of simple database applications and construct a real time 1,2,3,4,5
database application using current techniques
1. To study Basic SQL commands (create table, use , drop, insert) and execute the following queries
using these commands: (CO1)
 Create a table ‘Emp’ with attributes
‘ename’,’ecity’,’salary’,’enumber’,’eaddress’,’depttname’.
 Create another table ‘Company’ with attributes ‘cname’, ccity’,’empnumber’ in the
database ‘Employee’.
2. To study the viewing commands (select , update) and execute the following queries using these
commands:
 Find the names of all employees who live in Delhi.
 Increase the salary of all employees by Rs. 5,000.
 Find the company names where the number of employees is greater than 10,000.
 Change the Company City to Gurgaon where the Company name is ‘TCS’.
3. To study the commands to modify the structure of table (alter, delete) and execute the following
queries using these commands:
 Add an attribute named ‘ Designation’ to the table ‘Emp’.
 Modify the table ‘Emp’, Change the datatype of ‘salary’ attribute to float.
 Drop the attribute ‘depttname’ from the table ‘emp’.
 Delete the entries from the table ‘ Company’ where the number of employees are less
than 500.
4. To study the commands that involve compound conditions (and, or, in , not in, between , not
between , like , not like) and execute the following queries using these commands:
87
 Find the names of all employees who live in ‘ Gurgaon’ and whose salary is between Rs.
20,000 and Rs. 30,000.
 Find the names of all employees whose names begin with either letter ‘A’ or ‘B’.
 Find the company names where the company city is ‘Delhi’ and the number of employees
is not between 5000 and 10,000.
 Find the names of all companies that do not end with letter ‘A’.
5. To study the aggregate functions (sum, count, max, min, average) and execute the following queries
using these commands:
 Find the sum and average of salaries of all employees in computer science department.
 Find the number of all employees who live in Delhi.
 Find the maximum and the minimum salary in the HR department.
6. To study the grouping commands (group by, order by) and execute the following queries using these
commands:
 List all employee names in descending order.
 Find number of employees in each department where number of employees is greater
than 5.
 List all the department names where average salary of a department is Rs.10,000.
7. To study the commands involving data constraints and execute the following queries using these
commands:
 Alter table ‘Emp’ and make ‘enumber’ as the primary key.
 Alter table ‘Company’ and add the foreign key constraint.
 Add a check constraint in the table ‘Emp’ such that salary has the value between 0 and
Rs.1,00,000
 Alter table ‘Company’ and add unique constraint to column cname
 Add a default constraint to column ccity of table company with the value ‘Delhi’
8. To study the commands for joins ( cross join, inner join, outer join) and execute the following queries
using these commands:
 Retrieve the complete record of an employee and its company from both the table using
joins.
 List all the employees working in the company ‘TCS’.
9. To study the various set operations and execute the following queries using these commands:
 List the enumber of all employees who live in Delhi and whose company is in Gurgaon or if
both conditions are true.
 List the enumber of all employees who live in Delhi but whose company is not in Gurgaon.
10. To study the various scalar functions and string functions ( power, square, substring, reverse, upper,
lower, concatenation) and execute the following queries using these commands:
88
 Reverse the names of all employees.

 Change the names of company cities to uppercase.
 Concatenate name and city of the employee.
11. To study the commands involving indexes and execute the following queries:
 Create an index with attribute ename on the table employee.
 Create a composite index with attributes cname and ccity on table company.
 Drop all indexes created on table company.
12. To study the conditional controls and case statement in PL‐SQL and execute the following queries:
 Calculate the average salary from table ‘Emp’ and print increase the salary if the average
salary is less that 10,000.
 Display the deptno from the employee table using the case statement if the deptname is
‘Technical’ then deptno is 1, if the deptname is ‘HR’ then the deptno is 2 else deptno is 3.
13. To study procedures and triggers in PL‐SQL and execute the following queries:
 Create a procedure on table employee to display the details of employee to display the
details of employees by providing them value of salaries during execution.
 Create a trigger on table company for deletion where the whole table is displayed when
delete operation is performed.
14. Consider the tables given below. The primary keys are made bold and the data types are specified.
PERSON( driver_id:string , name:string , address:string )
CAR( regno:string , model:string , year:int )
ACCIDENT( report_number:int , accd_date:date , location:string )
OWNS( driver_id:string , regno:string )
PARTICIPATED( driver_id:string , regno:string , report_number:int ,
damage_amount:int)
a. Create the above tables by properly specifying the primary keys and foreign keys.
b. Enter at least five tuples for each relation.
c. Demonstrate how you
 Update the damage amount for the car with specific regno in the accident with report
number 12 to 25000.
d. Find the total number of people who owned cars that were involved in accidents in the
year 2008.
Find the number of accidents in which cars belonging to a specific model were involved.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth and S. Sudarshan‐ “Database System Concepts”, Sixth
Edition, McGraw‐Hill, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Ramez Elmasri and Shamkant B. Navathe, “Fundamental Database Systems”, Seventh Edition,
Pearson Education,2016
89
SEMESTER IV
COURSE TITLE DISCRETE MATHEMATICS CREDITS 4
CIA 50% ESE 50%
Write an argument using logical notation and determine if the 1,2,3,4
1.
argument is valid or not valid.
2. Understand the ideas of permutations and combinations. 1,2,3,4
3. Demonstrate an understanding of relations and functions 1,2,3,4
4. Recognize the principles of the group theory. 1,2,3,4
5. Design model problems in computer science using Graphs. 1,2,3,4
MODULE 1: LOGICS AND PROOFS (9L+3T)
Propositions – Logical connectives – Compound propositions – Conditional and bi‐conditional
propositions – Truth tables – Tautologies and contradictions – Contra positive – Logic equivalences and
implications. Predicates – Statement function – Variables – Free and bound variables – Quantifiers –
Universe of discourse – Logical equivalences and implications for quantified statements.
Suggested Reading: Basics of logical operators
MODULE2: COMBINATORICS (9L+3T)
Mathematical Induction‐Strong induction and well ordering – the basics of counting – The pigeonhole
principle – Permutations and combinations – Recurrence relations – inclusion and exclusion and
applications.
Suggested Reading: Basics of probability
MODULE 3: SETS AND FUNCTIONS (9L+3T)
Sets: Relations on sets – Types of relations and their properties – Partitions – Equivalence relations –
Partial ordering – Poset – Hasse diagram. Functions: Characteristic function of a set – Hashing functions
– Recursive functions – Permutation functions.
Suggested Reading: Basic concepts of sets and Functions
MODULE 4: ALGEBRAIC SYSTEMS (9L+3T)
Groups, Cyclic Groups, Subgroups, Cosets, Lagrange’s theorem, Normal subgroups – Codes and group
codes – Decodes.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Groups
MODULE 5: GRAPHS (9L+3T)
Graphs and graphs models – Graph terminology and special types of graphs – Representing graphs and
graph isomorphism – connectivity – Euler and Hamilton paths.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Graphs
TEXT BOOKS
1. A. Singaravelu, M. P. Jeyaraman, “Discrete Mathematics”, Meenakshi Agency, 2013.
2. Kenneth H. Roshan, “Discrete Mathematics and its Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
90
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Trembly J.P and Monohar R, “Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer
Science”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Trivedi.K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2002.
3. J. A. Bondy and U.S.R Murty, “Graph Theory”, Springer, 2008.
E BOOKS
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc16_ma01/preview
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/understanding‐queues
COURSE TITLE COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL -2
1. Recall the basic structure and operation of a computer system. 1,2,12
Familiarize with arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of different 1,2,12
2.
arithmetic operations.
3. Explain the concept of pipelining and parallelism. 1,2,12
Know the difference between Cache and Virtual memory and related performance 1,2,12
4.
issues.
Demonstrate different ways of communicating with I/O devices and standard I/O 1,2,12
5.
interfaces.
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION (9L)
Eight ideas – Components of a computer system – Technology – Performance – Power wall –
Uniprocessors to multiprocessors; Instructions – operations and operands – representing instructions
– Addressing and addressing modes.
Suggested reading: http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102062/1
MODULE 2: ARITHMETIC FOR COMPUTERS (9L)
ALU ‐ Integer Addition, Integer Subtraction, Dealing/ Detecting with Overflow ‐ Designing ALU for MIPS,
Multiplication‐ Multiply Algorithm‐ Optimized Multiplier‐ Faster Multiplier, Division‐ Divide Algorithm‐
Optimized Divider – Floating Point operations‐ Standard‐ IEEE Floating‐Point Format.
MODULE 3: MIPS & PIPELINING (9L)
Basic MIPS implementation – Building datapath – Control Implementation scheme – Pipelining –
Pipelined datapath and control – Handling Data hazards & Control hazards – Exceptions.
91
MODULE 4 - INSTRUCTION-LEVEL PARALLELISM (9L)

Instruction‐level‐parallelism – Parallel processing challenges – Flynn's classification – Hardware
multithreading – Multicore processors.
MODULE 5 – MEMORYAND I/O (9L)
Memory hierarchy ‐ Cache Memory ‐ Virtual memory, TLBs ‐ Input/output system, programmed I/O,
DMA and interrupts, I/O processors.
TEXT BOOKS
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer organization and design’, Morgan
Kaufmann / Elsevier, Fifth edition,
REFERENCE BOOKS
William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture”, Tenth Edition, Pearson Education,
1.
2016.
V.Carl Hamacher, Zvonko G. Varanesic and Safat G. Zaky, “Computer Organisation”, VI th edition,
2.
Mc Graw‐Hill Inc, 2012.
Vincent P. Heuring, Harry F. Jordan, “Computer System Architecture”, Second Edition, Pearson
3.
Education, 2005.
E BOOKS
1. https://sites.google.com/site/uopcog/ebooks
2. https://inspirit.net.in/books/academic/Computer%20Organisation%20and%20Architecture%2
08e%20by%20William%20Stallings.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/computer‐architecture‐coursera
2. https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/fundamentals‐computer‐architecture‐coursera
92
COURSE TITLE COMPUTER NETWORKS CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
Describe the functions of computer networks and various layered 1,2
1.
architectures.
Illustrate the various flow and error control techniques and identify the 1,2,3
2.
best method for efficient data transmission.
Apply various routing algorithms for a network and determine the optimal 3,4,5,12
3.
path.
4. Implement simple client‐server applications using TCP and UDP 3,4,5
Analyze the functions of various application layer protocols and use suitable 2,3,4
5.
application.
6. Integrate the working of protocols in higher level layers. 2,3,4,12
MODULE 1 - DATA COMMUNICATIONS (9L)

Components – Direction of Data flow – networks – Components and Categories – types of Connections
– Topologies –Protocols and Standards – ISO / OSI model – Transmission Media – Coaxial Cable – Fiber
Optics – Line Coding – Modems
Suggested Reading: http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/
MODULE 2 - DATA LINK LAYER (9L)
Error – detection and correction – Parity – LRC – CRC – Hamming code – Flow Control and Error control
‐ stop and wait – ARQ – selective repeat ARQ‐ sliding window – HDLC. Ethernet IEEE 802.3 ‐ IEEE 802.11
Suggested Reading: http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106091/
MODULE 3 -NETWORK LAYER (9L)
Internetworks – Packet Switching and Datagram approach – IP addressing methods – Subnetting –
Routing – Distance Vector Routing – Link State Routing – Broadcast and Multicast routing
Suggested Reading: nptel.ac.in/courses/106105084/6
MODULE 4 -TRANSPORT LAYER (9L)
Duties of transport layer – Multiplexing – Demultiplexing – Sockets – User Datagram Protocol (UDP) –
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) – Congestion Control – Quality of services (QOS)
MODULE 5 –APPLICATION LAYER (9L)
Domain Name Space (DNS) – SMTP – FTP – HTTP ‐ WWW ‐Security: Services ‐Cryptography – Public
key Cryptosystems.
CASE STUDIES (Non-Credit) with D-Link
1. Data centre ‐ Data Center Racks – Data centre Design – Switch ‐ Stacking – Cascading – Routing
– Cooling design – Power Design – Data centre products ‐ Fire Safety
93
2. Wi‐Fi Alliance Certifications‐Small Business and Teleworker WLAN Security‐Basic WLAN Design
considerations‐Configuration MSSID‐Air premier NAP Operation modes‐Air premier NAP
management‐Introduction to unified wireless solution‐unified wireless usage
3. IP Camera Management: IP Camera Technical specifications‐IP Camera form factor‐IP Camera
Image features – D‐Link IP Camera Advanced Configurations
4. Switch Management: Overview of D Link Switches and features ‐ Accessing and configuration
the switch ‐ Switch learning process ‐ VLAN and GVRP. Understanding Spanning Tree protocol –
Switch life cycle ‐ Basic‐Understanding D Link Switching features like DHCP, ACL, LDP and System
Maintenance.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, 5th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. James F. Kurose and Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking: A Top‐Down Approach Featuring
the Internet”, 5th Ed., Pearson Education, 2013.
2. L.Peterson and Peter S. Davie, “Computer Networks”, 5th Ed., Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, 5th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communication”, 8th Ed., Pearson, 2007.
5. William Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security – Principles and Practices”, Prentice Hall
of India, Fourth Edition, 2005
E BOOKS
1. https://ia800400.us.archive.org/31/items/Data.Communications.and.Networking.5th.Edition/D
ata.Communications.and.Networking.5th.Edition.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/fundamentals‐network‐communications
2. https://www.udemy.com/computer‐networks‐course‐networking‐basics/
94
COURSE TITLE OPERATING SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Explain the basic functions and structure of operating systems. 1,2
2. Implement the process scheduling algorithms and process synchronization 1,2,3
techniques.
3. Detect and solve Deadlock problems. 1,2,3
4. Implement Memory Management Techniques. 1,2,3
5. Illustrate File system and disk I/O techniques. 1,2
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION (9L)

Introduction – Computer System Organization ‐ Computer System Architecture ‐ Computer System
Structure ‐ Operating System Operations ‐ Process Management – Memory Management ‐ Storage
Management – Protection Security ‐ Operating System Services – User Operating System Interface –
System Calls – Types of System calls – System Programs ‐ Process Concept – Process Scheduling –
Operations on Processes ‐ Inter‐process Communication
Suggested reading: http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106144/
MODULE 2: PROCESS SCHEDULING (9L)
Threads – Overview – Multithreading Models ‐ CPU Scheduling – Basic Concepts – Scheduling Criteria
– Scheduling Algorithms – The Critical‐Section Problem ‐ Peterson’s Solution – Synchronization
Hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of Synchronization – Monitors.
MODULE 3: DEADLOCKS (9L)

System Model – Deadlock Characterization – Methods for handling Deadlocks ‐Deadlock Prevention –
Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery from Deadlocks ‐ Storage Management –
Swapping – Contiguous Memory allocation – Paging – Structure of Page table ‐ Segmentation.
MODULE 4: PAGING AND FILE SYSTEM (9L)

Virtual Memory – Demand Paging – Copy‐on Write – Page Replacement – Allocation of frames –
Thrashing ‐ File Concept – Access Methods – Directory and Disk Structure – Directory Implementation
– Allocation Methods – Free‐space Management ‐ Disk Structure – Disk Attachment ‐ Disk Scheduling
‐ RAID Structure.
95
MODULE 5: DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS (9L)

Advantages of Distributed Systems ‐ Types of Network based Operating Systems ‐ Network Structure
‐ Communication Structure ‐Communication Protocols – TCP/IP ‐ Robustness ‐ Design Issues ‐
Distributed File Systems
Suggested reading: https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs42/
TEXT BOOKS
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, Ninth
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Harvey M. Deitel, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. William Stallings, “Operating System”, Ninth Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.goodreads.com/book/show/83833.Operating_System_Concepts
MOOC
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc16_cs10/preview
2. https://in.udacity.com/course/introduction‐to‐operating‐systems‐‐ud923
COURSE TITLE NETWORKING LAB CREDITS 1

CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Implement client and server concepts in Network system. 2,3,12
2. Implement various services of data link layer 3,4,12
3. Implement the different protocols. 4,5,6,12
4. Implement the concept of local area networks, their topologies, protocols. 4,5,12
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Develop a Client – Server application for chat.
2. Simulation of ARP / RARP.
3. Develop an application for transferring files over RS232
4. Write a program that takes a binary file as input and performs bit stuffing and CRC Computation
5. Simulation of Sliding‐Window protocol
6. Simulation of BGP / OSPF routing protocol
7. Develop a Client that contacts a given DNS Server to resolve a given host name
8. Write a Client to download a file from a HTTP Server.
9. Study of Network Simulators like NS2/Glomosim / OPNET
96
Experiments with D-Link

1. To access and configure the Switch for basic Switch operations.
2. Creating static V LAN, Dynamic (GVRP) VLANs and configuring Ports.
3. To configure routing using two different methods: static and dynamic.
4. To understand the fundamentals of networking and the TCP/IP protocol suite to be learnt.
5. To access and configure the Switch for basic Switch operations.
6. To create and configure a Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
7. To configure stacking using two different methods: physical and virtual.
8. To configure routing using two different methods: static and dynamic.
9. To configure DHCP, ACL, LLDP, and System Maintenance.
10. To learn the topologies for the basic WLAN Design
11. To learn the topology in the basic metropolitan area design
12. To configure two SSIDs and apply small business and teleworker security
13. To configure WPA2 PSK and WPA2‐EAP Authentication on unified Access points
14. To configure an Air premier NAP for WDS with AP mode
15. To perform the IP camera installation, configuration and the settings of Image setup, motion
detection, recording
16. To configure D‐View Cam software application.
17. To configure the network Video Recorder(NVR) for basic operations
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Basic WLAN Link Modeling
2. Design & Model WLAN Link.
3. Analysis of the performance of an IEEE® 802.11ac™ link by using beamforming
4. 802.11ax Parameterization for Waveform Generation and Simulation.
5. Generate an IEEE® 802.11ac™ transmission containing MAC frames suitable for performing
radio packet error rate (PER) receiver test
6. 802.11ac Packet Error Rate Simulation for 8x8 TGac Channel
7. 802.11ac Signal Recovery with Preamble Decoding
8. WLAN Link Modeling in Simulink
9. Joint Sampling Rate and Carrier Frequency Offset Tracking in WLAN receiver.
10. Design a receiver that is able to recover 802.11™ OFDM non‐HT based beacon packets
transmitted over the air from commercial 802.11 hardware.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, 5th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill,
2015.
97
COURSE TITLE OPERATING SYSTEMS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE CSB4242 COURSE CATEGORY PC COURSE CODE CSB4242
CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Install and use operating systems with an understanding of professional, 1,2,5,12
ethical and social issues. Windows, Linux etc.
2. Implement the process scheduling algorithms and process 1,2,3
synchronization techniques.
3. Solve Deadlock problems & to perform memory allocation. 1,2,3
4. Implement Memory Management Techniques. 1,2,3
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Program to report the behaviour of the OS to get the CPU type and model, kernel version.
2. Shell programming
a. command syntax
b. write simple functions
c. basic tests
3. Shell programming
a. loops
b. patterns
c. expansions
d. substitution
4. Program to get the amount of memory configured into the computer, amount of memory
currently available.
5. Implement the various process scheduling mechanisms such as FCFS, SJF, Priority, round –
robin.
6. Implement the solution for reader – writer’s problem.
7. Implement the solution for dining philosopher’s problem.
8. Implement banker’s algorithm.
9. Implement the first fit; best fit and worst fit file allocation strategy.
10. Write a program to create processes and threads.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, Ninth
Edition, 2013.
2. Harvey M. Deitel, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. William Stallings, “Operating System”, Ninth Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
4. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.goodreads.com/book/show/83833.Operating_System_Concepts
MOOC
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc16_cs10/preview
2. https://in.udacity.com/course/introduction‐to‐operating‐systems‐‐ud923
98
SEMESTER V
COURSE TITLE PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE MAA4302 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0
CIA 50% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL :1-4
1. Understand the concept of Probability and one‐dimensional random variable. 1,2,12
2. Understand the importance of discrete and continuous distributions. 1,2,12
3. Explore the random experiments specified by two dimensional random 1,2,4,12
variables.
4. Perform test of hypothesis as well as calculate confidence interval for the 1,2,4,12
population parameter.
5. Obtain knowledge on design of experiments. 1,2,3,12
MODULE 1: PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES (9L+3T)

Axioms of Probability‐ Bayes’ Theorem ‐Random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions.
Suggested Reading: Basic Probability
MODULE 2: STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS (9L+3T)

Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions
Suggested Reading: Discrete and Continuous Functions.
MODULE 3: TWO-DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES (9L+3T)

Joint distribution – Marginal and conditional distribution – Co‐variance – Correlation and Regression
Suggested Reading: Random Variables
MODULE 4: TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS (9L+3T)

Sampling distributions – Testing of Hypothesis – Small samples – t Test, F Test and Chi‐square Test –
Large samples – Single mean – Difference in means – single proportion and difference in proportions.
Suggested Reading: Sampling Problems
MODULE 5: DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS (9L+3T)

Analysis of variance – One Way Classification – Completely Randomized block design – Two Way
Classification – Randomized block design – Latin Square design.
Suggested Reading: Analysis of variance
99
LAB/MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

Theory Only
TEXT BOOKS
1. Milton. J. S. and Arnold. J.C., "Introduction to Probability and Statistics", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition, 2007.
2. Johnson. R.A. and Gupta. C.B., "Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers",
Pearson Education, Asia, 7th Edition, 2007.
3. A. Chandrasekaran, G. Kavitha, “Probability, Statistics, Random Processes and Queuing Theory”,
Dhanam Publications, 2014.
4. Raj Kumar Bansal, Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its Applications in
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of
Probability and Statistics", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning, New
Delhi, 8th Edition, 2012.
2013.
E BOOKS
1. http:// nptel.ac.in/courses/ IIT‐MADRAS/ Principles_of_Communication1/ Pdfs/ 1_5.pdf
2. https://www.khanacademy.org
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐probability‐science‐mitx‐6‐041x‐2
100
COURSE TITLE WEB TECHNOLOGY CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1. Demonstrate HTML Pages and CSS. 1,3,4,5
2. Identify the need of JScripts & its Validations (Client). 1,2,4,5
3. Implement Bootstrap pages using HTML5. 1,2,3,4,5
4. Implement Server‐side programming using Servlets 1,3,4,5
5. Execute Servlets with Database connectivity 1,2,3,4,5
6. Summarize various web standards and its Application 1,2,4,5
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION (5L+4P)

Introduction – Network concepts – Web concepts – Internet addresses ‐ Common Gateway Interface:
Programming CGI Scripts – HTML ‐ basic HTML tags – Cascading Style Sheets HTML Forms– Server Side
Includes – Custom Database‐ Query Scripts ‐ Server security issues.
1. Create a web page with the following CSS.
a) Inline style sheets.
b) Internal style sheets.
c) External style sheets.
Create a HTML form for reading Name, Age, Gender, Address, Payment Options, Phone
number, Email address, preferred user name, various Area of Interest etc. from the user.
MODULE 2: SCRIPTING & CLIENT SIDE VALIDATION (5L+4P)
Introduction to XML Introduction to XHTML– DHTML ‐Cascading Style Sheets ‐ Scripting language‐ Java
Script: variables ‐ Control statements, Functions, Arrays, Objects – Events. Writing Client‐side validation
scripts, Node JS & Angular JS.
1. Write a Java Script program to validate the data including the email id entered by the user in the
above form are in correct format. Display error message if input is not in correct format. Call the
script when the page is submitted.
2. Write a simple XML program for Book store.
MODULE 3: RICH INTERNET APPLICATION & HTML5 (5L+4P)
AJAX enabled rich internet applications‐HTML review, Feature detection, The HTML5 new Elements,
Canvas, Video and audio, Web storage, Geolocation, Offline Webpages, Microdata, HTML5 APLS,
Migrating from HTML4 to HTML5, CSS3 and Bootstrap.
101
1. Create a HTML form with the following HTML5 controls – (Color–Date‐Email‐Month –Range‐
Number (with inputs from 1 to 100) –URL).
2. Using Canvas & SVG in HTML5 write a program to draw line, arc, rectangle and circle. Fill colors
using gradient style.
Suggested reading:
1.http://wi.wu‐ien.ac.at/rgf/diplomarbeiten/BakkStuff/2011/201105Moldaschl_RIAD/Rich_Internet_
Application_Development‐20110527.pdf
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/bootstrap/bootstrap_tutorial.pdf
MODULE 4: SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMING (5L+4P)

Server side Programming – Java Servlets: Servlet container – Exceptions – Sessions and Session Tracking
– Using Servlet context – Dynamic Content Generation – Servlet Chaining and Communications –
Understanding Deployment Descriptor XML – Programming Servlet with SSI‐Programming Servlet with
AJAX .
1. Write a simple Java Servlet Program to read the values entered using HTML form controls and
display the same.
2. Create a Java Servlet program for finding the biggest of three numbers. Use AJAX to display the
result without loading the entire page.
Suggested reading:
1.https://www.btechguru.com/training‐‐programming‐‐j2ee‐‐servelets‐‐1what‐is‐a‐servlet‐
video‐lecture‐‐12106‐‐24‐‐154.html
2. https://www.w3schools.com/xml/ajax_intro.asp
MODULE 5: DATABASE CONNECTIVITY AND WEB STANDARDS (5L+4P)

DATABASE CONNECTIVITY: Java Data Base Connectivity ‐ Introduction ‐ Drivers‐Establishing
connection – Types of Statements‐Result Sets‐ Introduction to Java Server Pages.
WEB STANDARDS - WEB 2.0 – History, characteristics, technologies, concepts, usage, web2.0 in
education, philanthropy, social work. Web 3.0 – Theory and history understanding basic web artifacts
and applications, implementation.
1. Create a three‐tier application using servlets for displaying student mark list. Fetch the results from
the database using the entered register number.
2. Create a three‐tier application using servlets for conducting on‐line examination. Create a login
page and verify the user name and password before allowing for examination. Use Session key
management for the same.
Suggested reading:
https://beginnersbook.com/2013/05/servlet‐tutorial/
102
TEXT BOOKS
1. Deitel, Deitel and Neito, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Pearson Education
Asia, 5th Edition, 2011.
2. Jason Hunter, William Crawford “Java Servlet Programming” O’Reilly Publications, 2nd Edition,
2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Elliotte Rusty Herold, “Java Network Programming”, O’Reilly Publications, 3rd Edition, 2004.
2. Eric Ladd and Jim O’Donnell, et al, “USING HTML 4, XML, and JAVA1.2”, Prentice Hall, 2003
E BOOKS
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/web_developers_guide/web_pdf_version.htm
2. http://home.hit.no/~hansha/documents/software/software_development/topics/resources/p
rogramming/exercises/Introduction%20to%20Web%20Programming.pdf
3. http://www.intuc.net/office_meeting_report/Ajax_SampleChapter.pdf
4. http://repository.mdp.ac.id/ebook/oreilly‐books/OReilly.Java.Servlet%20Programming.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/courses?query=web%20design%20for%20everybody%20(basics%2
0of%20web%20development%20and%20coding)
COURSE TITLE THEORY OF COMPUTATION CREDITS 4

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Apply the theoretical concepts and techniques in designing finite automata. 1,2
2. Convert regular expressions to FA and minimize Automata. 1,2
3. Write context free Grammar and design PDA for the Grammar. 1,2
4. Find Normal Form for given CFG. 1,2
5. Design Turing machine and identify recursively enumerable language 1,2,3
6. Define undecidability and identify class P and NP problems. 1,2
MODULE 1: AUTOMATA INTRODUCTION (9L + 3T)

Introduction to Formal Proof, Additional Forms of Proof, Inductive Proofs, Finite Automata (FA),
Deterministic Finite Automata (DFA), Non‐Deterministic Finite Automata (NFA), Finite Automata with
Epsilon Transitions.
Suggested Reading: https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs34/unit?unit=7&lesson=10
103
MODULE 2: REGULAR EXPRESSIONS AND LANGUAGES (9L+ 3T)

Regular Expression ‐ FA and Regular Expressions‐ RE To NFA, NFA To RE‐, RE To DFA, DFA To RE, Proving
Languages Not to Be Regular, Closure Properties Of RL, Equivalence and Minimization of Automata.
MODULE 3: CONTEXT FREE GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGES (9L+ 3T)
Introduction to Context Free Grammar‐ Parse Trees‐ Ambiguity in Grammars and Languages‐ Definition
of the Pushdown Automata‐ Languages of A Pushdown Automata‐ Equivalence Of Pushdown Automata
and CFG‐ Deterministic Pushdown Automata
MODULE 4: NORMAL FORMS AND TURING MACHINE (9L + 3T)
Normal Forms for CFG - Pumping Lemma for CFL‐ Closure Properties of CFL‐ Introduction of Turing
Machine‐ Programming Techniques for Turing Machine.
MODULE 5: COMPUTATIONAL COMPLEXITY (9L + 3T)
Recursively Enumerable and Non‐Recursively Enumerable Languages ‐ Diagonalization Language‐
Undecidable Problem that is RE‐ Undecidable Problem About Turing Machine‐ Rice Theorem‐ Post’s
Correspondence Problem‐ Church Turing Thesis‐ The Classes Of P And NP, NP Complete and NP Hard
Problems.
Model A Turing Machine with Memory.
TEXT BOOKS
1. J.E. Hopcroft, R.Motwani and J.D.Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and
Computations”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. H.R. Lewis and C.H. Papadimitriou, “Elements of the theory of Computation”, Second Edition,
Pearson Education, 2003.
2. J.Martin, “Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation”, Third Edition, TMH,2003.
3. Micheal Sipser, “Introduction of the Theory and Computation”, Thomson Brokecole, 2013.
4. K.Krithivasan and R.Rama, Introduction to Formal Languages, Automata and Computation,
E BOOKS
1. cglab.ca/~michiel/TheoryOfComputation/TheoryOfComputation.pdf
MOOC
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc16_cs14
104
COURSE TITLE ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Define Artificial intelligence, Agents and its environments. 1,2,12
2. Relate different Search Strategies and constraint satisfaction problems to enable 1,2,4,12
Problem solving.
3. Compare the various Knowledge Representation Logic. 1,2,12
4. Illustrate the different forms of Learning mechanisms. 1,2,12
5. Identify the need of Production system and Planning states. 1,2,12
6. Examine the working principle of Expert System. 1,2,12
MODULE 1: PROBLEM SOLVING (9L)
Introduction to AI- Agents and Environments – Uninformed Search Strategies‐ Informed Search
Strategies‐ Local Search Algorithm‐ Problem Formulation‐Constraint Satisfaction Problem.
MODULE 2: KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION (9L)
Introduction to Game Playing‐Alpha Beta Pruning‐Knowledge Representation using First order logic‐
Knowledge Engineering in First Order Logic‐Proportional vs First Order Logic‐Resolution‐Structured
representation of Knowledge Using Scripts and Frames.
MODULE 3: INFERENCE AND LEARNING (9L)
Inference‐ Forward and Backward Chaining‐Unification‐Uncertainty‐Inference in Bayesian Network –
Learning from Observations‐Forms of Learning‐Inductive Learning‐Neural Network‐Learning Decision
trees‐Reinforcement Learning‐Case Study‐Learning examples with python.
MODULE 4: PRODUCTION SYSTEM AND PLANNING (9L)
Introduction to Production system‐control strategies‐Rete Algorithm‐Planning‐STRIPS‐Planning with
state space search‐Partial Order Planning‐Planning Graphs‐Planning & acting in the real world.
MODULE 5: EXPERT SYSTEM (9L)
Expert System‐ Architecture and Roles of Expert System‐Typical Expert System‐MYCIN‐XOON‐DART‐
Case Study‐Construction of simple reflex agent with sensor and actuator using Arduino.
TEXT BOOKS
Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
1.
Education / Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
Joseph C. Giarratano , Gary D. Riley ,”Expert Systems : Principles and Programming”,4th Edition,
2.
2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Nils J. Nilsson, “Artificial Intelligence: A new Synthesis”, Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2000.
Janakiraman, K. Sarukesi, ‘Foundations of Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems’, Macmillan
2.
Series in Computer Science, 2000.
105
W. Patterson, ‘Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems’, Prentice Hall of India,
3.
2003.
4. Artificial Intelligence with python, Prateek Joshi,2017.
E BOOKS
https://www.pdfdrive.net/artificial‐intelligence‐a‐modern‐approach‐3rd‐edition‐
1.
e32618455.html
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/courses?query=artificial%20intelligence
COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ETHICS AND LIFE SKILLS CREDITS 2

COURSE CODE GEA4216 COURSE CATEGORY HS L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Understand human values. 6,7,8
2. Follow Engineering ethics and safety. 6,7,8
3. Take responsibilities and rights. 6,7,8
4. Understand life skills. 6,7,8
MODULE 1: HUMAN VALUES (6L)
Definition of ethics‐Morals values and ethics – integrity‐Work ethics‐ Service Learning‐Civic Virtue‐
Respect for others‐ Caring‐Sharing‐Honesty‐Courage ‐ Valuing time‐Cooperation‐Commitment‐
Empathy‐Self‐confidence‐Character‐Spirituality‐Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional
excellence and stress management.
Self-Study: Case study of Discovery failure
MODULE 2: ENGINEERING ETHICS (6L)

Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles ‐ Theories about right action – Self‐interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of Ethical
Theories.
Self-study: Study the Bhopal gas tragedy
MODULE 3: SAFETY, RESPOSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS (6L)
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk ‐ Respect for
Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime –
Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination.
Self-study: Chernobyl explosion, Nuclear and thermal power plant issues
106
MODULE 4: LIFE SKILLS (6L)

Definition, Relevance, Types of values, changing concepts of values‐aims and values of value
education‐ basic etiquette‐morals and values in life‐dealing with people. Personal values – Self –
Strengths (self‐confidence, self‐assessment, self‐reliance, self‐discipline, determination, self‐restraint,
contentment, humility, sympathy and compassion, gratitude, forgiveness) Weaknesses.
Self-study: Influences ‐ Peer pressure, familial and societal expectations, media
MODULE 5: SOCIETIES IN PROGRESS (6L)
Definition of society; Units of society; Communities – ancient and modern – Agents of change – Sense
of survival, security, desire for comfort and ease sense of belonging, social consciousness and
responsibility.
Self-study: Personal value and professional value of Engineers on societies perception
TEXT BOOKS
1. Subramanian R., Professional ethics, Oxford University press, 2010.
Manoharan P.K., Education and Personality Development, APH Publishing Corporation, New
2.
Delhi, 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS
Megan J. Murphy (Editor), Lorna Hecker (Editor), Ethics and Professional Issues in Couple and
1.
Family Therapy.
Andrew Belsey (Editor), Ruth Chadwick (Editor), Ethical Issues in Journalism and the Media
2.
(Professional Ethics).
3. Warwick Fox (Editor), Ethics and the Built Environment (Professional Ethics).
4. Ruchika Nath, Value Education, APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 2008.
107
COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT WITH IoT CREDITS 1

CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Identify IoT fundamental design, sensors and actuator. 1,2,12
2. Describe different kinds of protocols and connectivity technologies in IoT. 1,2,12
3. Demonstrate simple IoT programs. 1,2,12
4. Implement IoT system using Raspberry pi / Arduino. 1,2,3,12
5. Integrate IoT devices with Android apps and database. 1,2,3,12
6. Investigate a case study in IoT project. 1,2,4,12
Prerequisites: Basic Programming Language, Python
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Basics of Internet of Things: Sensors, Actuators, IoT architecture and Gateway.
2. IoT Networking: Connectivity technologies, Protocols and Interoperability in IoT.
3. Blinking LED through Raspberry pi or Arduino.
4. IoT sensors interface with Raspberry pi or Arduino (Temperature/Light sensors).
5. Integration of Actuators with Raspberry pi or Arduino (Servo motor/Relay).
6. Capture Image with Raspberry pi or Arduino.
7. Design Traffic control system: using Raspberry pi or Arduino.
8. Design Temperature dependent auto cooling system: Using Raspberry pi or Arduino.
9. IoT applications in home automation: Implementing IoT home application using Raspberry pi or
Arduino.
10. Case study: Emergence of IoT Healthcare.
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Smart Emergency Response System
2. MATLAB and the Internet of Things (IoT): Collecting and Analysing IoT Data.
3. Analyzing Test Data from a Worldwide Fleet of Fuel Cell Vehicles at Daimler.
4. Developing an IoT Analytics System with MATLAB, Machine Learning, and ThingSpeak.
5. Cadmus Collects and Analyzes Energy Data in Near Real Time Using MATLAB and the Thing
Speak Internet of Things Platform.
6. Analyzing Weather Data from an Arduino‐Based Weather Station.
7. Track the location of android phone using MATLAB & the Internet of Things (IoT).
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands‐on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015.
2. Honbo Zhou, “The Internet of Things in the Cloud:A Middleware Perspective” –– CRC Press‐
2012.
108
3. Manoel Carlos Ramon, “Intel® Galileo and Intel® Galileo Gen 2: API Features and Arduino
Projects for Linux Programmers”, Apress, 2014.
E BOOKS
1. http://file.allitebooks.com/20170102/Building%20Arduino%20Projects%20for%20the%20Inter
net%20of%20Things%202016.pdf
MOOC
1. https://iot‐lab‐manual.sep.wiki/
2. learn.sparkfun.com/tutorials/internet‐of‐things‐experiment‐guide
109
SEMESTER VI
COURSE TITLE PRINCIPLES OF COMPILER DESIGN CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSB4316 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0- 1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Explain the basics of compiler and various phases of Compiler 1,2
2 Apply the lexical analysis techniques 2,3
3 Describe the Syntactic analysis techniques 2,3
4 Analyze Semantic models 3,4
5 Enumerate and Apply Code optimization and Code Generation techniques 3,4,5
6 Describe Code Generation in Compilers 3,4
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION& LEXICAL ANALYSIS (9)
Introduction to Compilers‐ Compiler Vs Interpreter –Cross Compiler – Boot strapping –– Cousins of
the Compiler‐ Compiler construction tools‐ Phases of a compiler –– Grouping of Phases –– Symbol
table management ‐ Lexical Analysis – Role of Lexical Analyzer – Input Buffering – Specification of
Tokens: Regular Expressions, Recognition of Tokens: Construction of NFA‐DFA‐Minimization of DFA
Suggested Reading: http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108052/1
MODULE 2: SYNTAX ANALYSIS (9)
Role of the parser –Writing Grammars –Context‐Free Grammars – Error Recovery Strategies‐Top
Down parsing: Recursive Descent Parsing – Left recursion‐ Left Factoring‐Predictive Parsing – Bottom‐
Up Parsing: Shift Reduce Parsing – Operator Precedent Parsing – LR Parsers – SLR Parser – Canonical
LR Parser – LALR Parser.
MODULE 3: SEMANTIC ANALYSIS (9)
Syntax Directed Translations: Syntax‐directed definitions, Translation Schemes‐ construction of syntax
trees ‐ DAG’S‐ bottom‐up evaluation of s‐attributed definitions ‐ l‐attributed definitions‐ Data type as
set of values with set of operations‐ data types; type checking models; semantic models of user ‐
defined types; parametric polymorphism; subtype polymorphism; type‐checking algorithms.
Suggested Reading:http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108113/12
MODULE 4: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING (9)
Intermediate languages – Declarations – Assignment Statements – Array Elements ‐ Boolean
Expressions – Case Statements – Back patching – Procedure calls‐ Principal Sources of Optimization –
Optimization of basic Blocks‐ loop optimization.
Suggested Reading:http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108113/17
110
MODULE 5: CODE GENERATION (9)

Issues in the design of code generator – The target machine – Runtime Storage management – Basic
Blocks and Flow Graphs – Next‐use Information – A simple Code generator – DAG representation of
Basic Blocks – Peephole Optimization.
TEXT BOOK
1 Alfred Aho, Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D Ullman, ―Compilers Principles, Techniques and Tools,
Pearson Education , New International edition, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Steven S.Muchnick “Advanced Compiler design implementation” Morgan Kaufmann/ Elsevier
Science India, 2003
2 Allen I. Holub ―Compiler Design in C, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
E BOOKS
Keith D. Cooper and Linda Torczon, Engineering a compiler, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,
1
2012.
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/cs1‐compilers‐stanford‐online
COURSE TITLE MACHINE LEARNING CREDITS 4

CIA 60% ESE 40%
Explain various machine learning algorithms and execute simple commands 2,3,12
1
using Python ML library.
Identify and Implement suitable supervised learning algorithms to an 1,2,3,4,5,12
2
application.
3 Apply suitable unsupervised learning algorithms to an application 2,3,4,5,12
4 Use artificial neural networks to given application. 2,3,4,5,12
5 Implement probabilistic graphical models for suitable applications. 2,3,4,5,12
Prerequisites : Probability and Statistics
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING (9L+6P)
Machine Learning Fundamentals –Types of Machine Learning ‐ Examples of Machine Learning ‐ Basic
concepts in Machine Learning.
Probability‐ A brief review of probability theory – Common discrete and continuous distributions –
Joint probability distributions.
111
(i) Installation of Python Libraries/ MATLAB tools for Machine Learning
(ii) Execution of simple commands using Scikit‐Learn Machine Learning library/
MATLAB and datasets
Suggested reading:
 Introduction to Machine Learning ‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/1
 Probability basics‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/5
MODULE 2: SUPERVISED LEARNING (9L+6P)
Regression: Linear Regression – Multivariate Regression‐ Classification: Linear Discriminant
Analysis,Logistic Regression‐ K‐Nearest Neighbor classifier.
Decision Tree based methods for classification and Regression‐ Ensemble methods.
Practical Component: (Using Python Libraries /MATLABTool)
(iv) Implementation of Multivariate Linear Regression
(v) Implementation of Decision Trees
Suggested reading:
 Linear Regression ‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/12
 Decision Trees ‐http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/39
MODULE 3: UNSUPERVISED LEARNING (9L+6P)
Clustering‐ K‐Means clustering, Hierarchical clustering ‐ The Curse of Dimensionality ‐Dimensionality
Reduction ‐ Principal Component Analysis ‐ Probabilistic PCA‐ Independent Components analysis
Practical Component: (Using Python Libraries / MATLABTool)
(iv) Implementation of K‐means clustering.
(v) Implementation of Principal Component Analysis.
Suggested reading:
Dimensionality Reduction ‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/14
MODULE 4: ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND KERNEL MACHINES (9L+6P)
Perceptron‐ Multilayer perceptron‐ Back Propagation – Initialization, Training and Validation Support
Vector Machines(SVM) as a linear and non‐linear classifier ‐ Limitations of SVM
(iv) Implementation of Artificial Neural Network.
(v) Implementation of SVM.
Suggested reading:
 ANN ‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/32
 SVM ‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/26
MODULE 5: PROBABILISTIC GRAPHICAL MODELS (9L+6P)
Bayesian Networks ‐ Learning Naive Bayes classifiers‐Markov Models – Hidden Markov Models
Sampling – Basic sampling methods – Monte Carlo ‐Reinforcement Learning
(i) Implementation of Naïve Bayes Classifier.
(ii) Implementation of Reinforcement Learning.
112
Suggested reading:
 Hidden Markov Model ‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/67
 Reinforcement Learning‐ http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106139/83
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Handwriting Recognition Using Bagged Classification Trees.
2. Regression with Boosted Decision Trees: Boston House Prices.
3. Color‐Based Segmentation Using K‐Means Clustering
4. Credit Rating by Bagging Decision Trees
5. Selecting Features for Classifying High‐Dimensional Data.
6. Write a code for fitting a curve to a set of points, and fitting a probability distribution to a
sample of data
7. Write a code to visualize multivariate data using various statistical plots
8. Write a code for Selecting Features for Classifying High‐dimensional Data.
9. Write a code to perform classification using discriminant analysis, naive Bayes classifiers, and
decision trees.
10. Analyze time series data using Statistics and Machine Learning Toolbox™ features.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Kevin P. Murphy, “Machine Learning: A Probabilistic Perspective”, MIT Press, 2012.
2 Christopher Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning” Springer, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Stephen Marsland, “Machine Learning –An Algorithmic Perspective”, CRC Press, 2009.
2 Andreas C. Muller, “Introduction to Machine Learning with Python: A Guide for Data Scientists”,
O'Reilly,2016.
3 Sebastian Raschka, “Python Machine Learning”, Packt Publishing, 2015.
4 Hastie, Tibshirani, Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning: Data Mining, Inference, and
Prediction”,2nd Edition, Springer, 2017.
5 Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, 2nd Revised edition, MIT Press,2010.
E BOOKS
http://pdf.th7.cn/down/files/1603/Mastering%20Machine%20Learning%20with%20scikit‐
1
learn.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/machine‐learning#syllabus
2 https://in.udacity.com/course/intro‐to‐machine‐learning‐‐ud120
3 https://www.udemy.com/machinelearning/
113
COURSE TITLE DATAWAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
Illustrate the concepts of data mining and data warehousing concepts and
1 1,2
techniques.
2 Apply Data Mining Techniques Using Classification Techniques 3,4,5,12
3 Articulate the Different Classification Algorithm Using Data Mining Techniques 3,4
4 Examine Data Mining Techniques Using Clustering and Association Rules 4,5
5 Illustrate Advanced Mining Techniques 3,4
6 Design Data Warehousing and Data Mining Systems for Real‐World Applications 4,5,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION (9)
Introduction to data warehousing, evolution of decision support systems, Data Warehouse
Architectures: Centralized Architecture, Federated Architecture, Multi‐Tired Architecture,
Components of a Data Warehouse, Data Mining Tasks, Data mining Issues, Decision Support System,
Dimensional Modeling, OLAP & its tools, OLTP.
Suggested reading :https://www.cs.uct.ac.za/mit_notes/database/pdfs/chp19.pdf
MODULE 2: MINING TECHNIQUES: CLASSIFICATION (9)
Introduction, statistical Perspective of data mining, Decision tree, Neural networks, Genetic
algorithms, Issues in classification, Statistical based algorithm(regression), Distance based
algorithm(simple approach), Decision Tree based algorithm(C4.5), Neural network based
(propagation).
MODULE 3: MINING TECHNIQUES : CLUSTERING AND ASSOCIATION RULES (9)
Introduction to clustering, Similarity and distance measures, Hierarchical algorithm(divisive
clustering), partitional algorithm (Minimum Spanning tree, nearest neighbour), Clustering large
database(CURE), Introduction to association, basic algorithm(Apriori), parallel & distributed(data
parallelism), Incremental rules, Association rule techniques(Generalized, multiple level)
Suggested reading :https://www.experfy.com/training/courses/clustering-and-association-rule-
mining
MODULE 4: ADVANCED MINING (9)
Web mining, Web content mining, Introduction to Spatial mining & its primitives, spatial classification
algorithm (ID3 extension), Spatial clustering algorithm (SD), Introduction to temporal mining, Time
series, Temporal association rule.
Suggested reading: Data Mining: Introductory and Advanced Topics
114
MODULE 5: DATA MINING ENVIRONMENT (9)

Case study in building business environment, Application of data mining in Government National data
warehouse and case studies, Social Impacts of Data Mining
TEXT BOOKS
1 Margaret H. Dunham, S. Sridhar "Data Mining Introductory & Advance Topics" ‐ 2010
2 C.S.R. Prabhu, “Data Warehousing: Concept, Techniques, Products and Applications”, Prentice
Hall of India, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 J.Han, M.Kamber, “Data Mining: Concept and Techniques”, Academic Press, Morgan Kanfman
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2012.
2 Alex Berson and Stephen J. Smith “Data Warehousing, Data Mining & OLAP”, Tata McGraw Hill,
2016.
3 Pieter Adrians, DolfZantinge, “Data Mining”, Addison Wesley, 2000.
E BOOKS
1 https://cs.wmich.edu/~yang/teach/cs595/han/ch01.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/data‐warehouse‐concepts‐design‐and‐data‐integration‐
coursera
2 https://www.coursera.org/specializations/data‐mining
3 https://swayam.gov.in/courses/4412‐data‐mining
115
COURSE TITLE MODERN SOFTWARE ENGINEERING CREDITS 4

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Apply the concepts of life cycle models to choose the appropriate model 2,3
2 Analyse the requirements and design the software 3,4,5
3 Construct or implement the software based on the industry standards 3,4
4 Design, develop test cases and able to test. 3,4,5
Work with version control and work on configuration and release management
5 4,5,12
plans
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION SOFTWARE ENGINEERING PROCESSES (9L+6P)
Introduction –S/W Engineering Paradigm – life cycle models (water fall‐incremental‐WIN WIN Spiral‐
evolutionary, prototyping, object oriented) ‐ system engineering – Modern software engineering
process‐Agile development‐SCRUM‐ASD
Lab Component: Estimate Sprint planning run using Jira for a business need.
MODULE 2: SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTSANALYSIS (9L+6P)
Functional and non‐functional ‐ user – system –requirement engineering process – feasibility studies
– requirements – elicitation – validation and management – verification& validation‐software
prototyping – prototyping in the software process – rapid prototyping techniques – user interface
prototyping ‐S/W document. Analysis and modeling – data, functional and behavioural models –
structured analysis and data dictionary
Lab Component: Identify functional and non functional requirement for a business need using JIRA.
MODULE 3: DESIGN CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES (9L+6P)
Design process and concepts – modular design – design heuristic – design model and document.
Architectural design – software architecture – data design – architectural design – transform and
transaction mapping – user interface design – user interface design principles. Real time systems ‐
Real time software design – system design – real time executives – data acquisition system ‐
monitoring and control system.
Lab Component: Using IBM Rational Architect / Rational Rose, Design business model using UML.
MODULE 4: SOFTWARE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING (9L+6P)
Software construction fundamentals ‐Managing construction‐ Construction technologies ‐
Construction tools ‐ Structured coding Techniques. Software Quality‐ Software Quality Dilemma‐
Achieving Software Quality‐ Testing: Strategic Approach to software Testing‐ Strategic Issues‐ Testing:
Strategies for Conventional Software, Object oriented software, Web Apps‐Validating Testing‐ System
Testing‐ Art of Debugging.
116
Lab Component: 1) raise a ticket from customer develop it and review using JIRA
2) Test the code using: Selenium(Webbased), Appium(Mobile based‐java), SoapQi(API), Jmeter
(Performance Testing)
MODULE 5: SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE AND MANAGEMENT (9L+6P)
Software Maintenance‐Software Supportability‐ Reengineering‐ Business Process Reengineering‐
Software Reengineering‐ Reverse Engineering‐ Restructuring‐ Forward Engineering‐ Economics of
Reengineering.
Software Configuration Management – Need for SCM ‐ Software release management and delivery ‐
Software configuration management tools.
Lab Component: Integrate JIRA with other tools for change management process.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Roger S. Pressman, Software engineering‐ A practitioner’s Approach, 7thEditon., McGraw‐Hill,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Ian Sommerville, Software engineering, Pearson education Asia, 6th edition, 2011
2 Pankaj Jalote‐ An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Springer Verlag, 2008
3 James F Peters and WitoldPedryez, “Software Engineering – An Engineering Approach”, John
Wiley and Sons, New Delhi, 2007
4 Carlo Gezzi, Mehdi Jazayeri and Dino Mandrioli, “Fundamentals of Software Engineering”, 2nd
Edition 2009.
5 Sheikh Umar Farooq, S. M. K QuadriandNesar Ahmad, “Software Testing Techniques Evaluation
– An Empirical Approach”, Lambert Academic Publishing, Germany, Dec 2012 (ISBN: 978‐3‐659‐
19538‐9).
E BOOKS
1 http://www4.ncsu.edu/~tjmenzie/cs510/pdf/SWEBOKv3.pdf
2 https://archive.org/details/SoftwareEngineering7thEDByRogerS.Pressman
3 https://edisciplinas.usp.br/mod/resource/view.php?id=1094198
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/courses?languages=en&query=software%20engineering
2 https://www.edx.org/course/software‐engineering‐introduction‐ubcx‐softeng1x
3 nptel.ac.in/courses/106101061/
117
COURSE TITLE BUSINESS ECONOMICS CREDITS 2

COURSE CODE GEA4304 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 2-0-0- 1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Describe the introduction of economics
2 Demonstrate about cost analysis
3 Build knowledge about consumer’s and producer’s behavior
4 Explain about budget
5 Educate about financial services
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS (6)
Introduction to Economics‐ Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Concept of Engineering
Economics – Engineering efficiency, Economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics
MODULE2: COST ANALYSIS (9)
Types of Cost, Element of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity cost, Break‐
even analysis, Economies of ScaleCost Classification
MODULE 3: CONSUMER’S AND PRODUCER’S BEHAVIOUR (9)
Consumer Behavior: Law of Diminishing Marginal utility – Equimarginal Utility – Consumer’s
Equilibrium ‐ Indifference Curve – Production: Law of Variable Proportion – Laws of Returns to Scale
– Producer‘s equilibrium – Economies of Scale Cost Classification.
MODULE 4: BUDGET (9)
Process of budgeting in India –classification of budgets trends – evaluation systems – types of deficits
– fiscal policy – indicators –– taxation – centre, state and local – public debt and management.
MODULE 5: FINANCE (9)
Basics of finance and financial environment – instruments of financial markets – financial
intermediation – investment banking and brokerage services – securities – types of securities – market
for securities – how and where traded – initial public offering (IPO) – secondary markets – trading on
exchanges and trading with margins.
TEXT BOOKS
1 S.Shankaran, Business Economics ‐ Margham Publications.
2 H.L. Ahuja, Business Economics – Micro & Macro ‐ Sultan Chand & Sons ‐ New
Delhi – 55.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 S.A.Ross, R.W.Westerfield, J.Jaffe and Roberts: Corporate Finance, McGraw‐Hill.
118
2 Joseph E Stiglitz: Economics of the Public Sector.

MOOC
1 https://sites.google.com/site/readbookpdf7734/pdf‐download‐business‐economics‐by‐‐‐
mark‐taylor‐read‐online
2 https://bookboon.com/en/economics‐ebooks
COMPILER DESIGN LAB

CIA 80% ESE 20%
1. Design and implement lexical analyser for C language 3,4
2. Implement lexical analyzer using LEX tool 3,5
3. Evaluate the descent parser for Expression grammar 3
Apply different compiler writing tools like LEX and YACC etc. to implement the
4. 3,5
different Phases.
5. Enumerate the semantic rules for YACC Program 1,2
6. Design a LEX and YACC to implement a HTML generator 3,4
Apply new code optimization techniques to improve the performance of a program
7. 3
in terms of speed & space.
8. Use new tools and technologies used for designing a compiler 4,5,12
Prerequisites: Nil
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Implement a lexical analyzer in “C”.
2. Use LEX tool to implement a lexical analyzer.
3. Implement a recursive descent parser for an expression grammar that generates arithmetic
expressions with digits, + and *.
4. Use YACC and LEX to implement a parser for the same grammar as given in problem 3.
5. Write semantic rules to the YACC program in problem 4 and implement a calculator that takes an
expression with digits, + and * and computes and prints its value.
6. Use Lex and YACC to implement a HTML generator so that the program generates a HTML file
which can be viewed in browser. Sample Input : Red Hello , 12 welcome should render the HTML
code for displaying ‘Hello’ in red and ‘Welcome’ with the size 12
119
7. Implement the front end of a compiler that generates the three address code for a simple
language with: one data type integer, arithmetic operators, relational operators, variable
declaration statement, one conditional construct, one iterative construct and assignment
statement.
8. Implement the back end of the compiler which takes the three address code generated in
problem 6, and produces the 8086 assembly language instructions that can be assembled and run
using a 8086 assembler. The target assembly instructions can be simple move, add, sub, jump.
Also simple addressing modes are used.
TEXT BOOKS
Alfred Aho, Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D Ullman, ―Compilers Principles, Techniques and Tools,
1.
Pearson Education , New International edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Steven S.Muchnick “Advanced Compiler design implementation” Morgan Kaufmann/ Elsevier
1
Science India, 2003
2 Allen I. Holub ―Compiler Design in C, Pren ce Hall of India, 2006.
COURSE TITLE SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Describe Project Management principles while developing software. 1,2,6,11,12
2 Gain extensive knowledge about the basic project management concepts, 1,2,3
framework and the process models.
3 Acquire adequate knowledge about software process models and software effort 1,2,11
estimation techniques.
4 Estimate the risks involved in various project activities. 2,3,6,11
5 Define the checkpoints, project reporting structure, project progress and tracking 2,3,11
mechanisms using project management principles.
6 Explain staff selection process and the issues related to people management 1,6,8,11,12
Prerequisites : Database basics
MODULE 1: PROJECT EVALUATION AND PROJECT PLANNING (9)
Importance of Software Project Management – Activities ‐ Methodologies – Categorization of Software
Projects – Setting objectives – Management Principles – Management Control – Project portfolio
Management – Cost‐benefit evaluation technology – Risk evaluation – Strategic program Management
– Stepwise Project Planning.
120
MODULE 2: PROJECT LIFECYCLE AND EFFORT ESTIMATION (9)

Software process and Process Models – Choice of Process models ‐ Rapid Application development
– Agile methods – Dynamic System Development Method – Extreme Programming– Managing
interactive processes – Basics of Software estimation – Effort and Cost estimation techniques – COSMIC
Full function points ‐ COCOMO II ‐ a Parametric Productivity Model.
MODULE 3: ACTIVITY PLANNING AND RISK MANAGEMENT (9)
Objectives of Activity planning – Project schedules – Activities – Sequencing and scheduling – Network
Planning models – Formulating Network Model – Forward Pass & Backward Pass techniques – Critical
path (CRM) method – Risk identification – Assessment – Risk Planning –Risk Management – – PERT
technique – Monte Carlo simulation – Resource Allocation – Creation of critical paths – Cost schedules.
MODULE 4: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL (9)
Framework for Management and control – Collection of data – Visualizing progress – Cost monitoring
– Earned Value Analysis – Prioritizing Monitoring – Project tracking – Change control – Software
Configuration Management – Managing contracts – Contract Management.
MODULE 5: STAFFING IN SOFTWARE PROJECTS (9)
Managing people – Organizational behavior – Best methods of staff selection – Motivation – The
Oldham – Hackman job characteristic model – Stress – Health and Safety – Ethical and Professional
concerns – Working in teams – Decision making – Organizational structures – Dispersed and Virtual
teams – Communications genres – Communication plans – Leadership.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterell and Rajib Mall: Software Project Management – Fifth Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012..
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Robert K. Wysocki ―Effective Software Project Management, Wiley Publication, 2011.
2 Kelkar Sa, “Software Project Management”, Third Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2012
3 Gopalaswamy Ramesh, ―Managing Global So ware Projects‖ – McGraw Hill Education (India),
Fourteenth Reprint 2013.
4 Walker Royce: Software Project Management‖‐ Addison‐Wesley, 1998.
EBOOKS
1 https://www.scribd.com/doc/194093672/Software‐Project‐Management‐Bob‐Hughes‐and‐Mike‐
Cotterell‐Tata‐Mcgraw‐Hill‐Edition
2 http://www.mim.ac.mw/books/Effective%20Project%20Management%20Traditional%20Adaptiv
e%20
Extreme%203rd%20Edition.pdf
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_mg08/preview
2 https://www.udemy.com/software‐project‐management‐for‐start‐ups/
121
COURSE TITLE BIG DATA AND ANALYTICS CREDITS 4

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Outline the importance of Big Data Analytics 1,2
2 Apply statistical techniques for Big data Analytics. 4,5,12
3 Analyze problems appropriate to mining data streams. 3,4,5
4 Apply the knowledge of clustering techniques in data mining. 3,4,5
5 Use Graph Analytics for Big Data and provide solutions 3,4,5,12
6 Apply Hadoop map Reduce programming for handing Big Data 4,5,12
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA (9L+6P)
Evolution of Big data ‐ Best Practices for Big data Analytics ‐ Big data characteristics ‐ Validating ‐ The
Promotion of the Value of Big Data ‐ Big Data Use Cases‐ Characteristics of Big Data Applications ‐
Perception and Quantification of Value ‐Understanding Big Data Storage ‐ Evolution Of Analytic
Scalability ‐ Analytic Processes and Tools ‐ Analysis vs Reporting ‐ Modern Data Analytic Tools ‐
Statistical Concepts: Sampling Distributions ‐ Re‐Sampling ‐ Statistical Inference ‐ Prediction Error.
1. Study of R Programming.
2. Hypothesis Test using R.
Suggested reading :https://www.coursera.org/learn/big-data-introduction
MODULE 2: DATA ANALYSIS, CLUSTERING AND CLASSIFICATION (9L+6P)
Regression Modeling ‐ Multivariate Analysis ‐ Bayesian Modeling ‐ Support Vector and Kernel Methods
‐ Analysis of Time Series: Linear Systems Analysis ‐ Nonlinear Dynamics ‐ Rule Induction. Overview of
Clustering ‐ K‐means ‐ Use Cases ‐ Overview of the Method ‐ Determining the Number of Clusters ‐
Diagnostics ‐ Reasons to Choose and Cautions .‐ Classification: Decision Trees ‐ Overview of a Decision
Tree ‐ The General Algorithm ‐ Decision Tree Algorithms ‐ Evaluating a Decision Tree ‐ Decision Trees
in R ‐ Naïve Bayes ‐ Bayes‘ Theorem ‐ Naïve Bayes Classifier.
1. K‐means Clustering using R
2. Naïve Bayesian Classifier
3. Implementation of Linear Regression
4. Implement Logistic Regression
MODULE 3: STREAM MEMORY (9L+6P)
Introduction To Streams Concepts – Stream Data Model and Architecture ‐ Stream Computing ‐
Sampling Data in a Stream – Filtering Streams – Counting Distinct Elements in a Stream – Estimating
Moments – Counting Oneness in a Window – Decaying Window ‐ Real time Analytics Platform(RTAP)
Applications ‐ Case Studies ‐ Real Time Sentiment Analysis, Stock Market Predictions.
Practical Component: Time‐series Analysis
122
MODULE 4: ASSOCIATION AND GRAPH MEMORY (9L+6P)

Advanced Analytical Theory and Methods: Association Rules ‐ Overview ‐ Apriori Algorithm ‐
Evaluation of Candidate Rules ‐ Applications of Association Rules ‐ Finding Association& finding
similarity ‐ Graph Analytics for Big Data: Graph Analytics ‐ The Graph Model ‐ Representation as Triples
‐ Graphs and Network Organization ‐ Choosing Graph Analytics ‐ Graph Analytics Use Cases ‐ Graph
Analytics Algorithms and Solution Approaches ‐ Technical Complexity of Analyzing Graphs‐ Features
of a Graph Analytics Platform.
1. Association Rules using R.
MODULE 5: FRAMEWORKS AND VISUALIZATION (9L+6P)
MapReduce – Hadoop, Hive, MapR – Sharding – NoSQL Databases ‐ S3 ‐ Hadoop Distributed File
Systems – Visualizations ‐ Visual Data Analysis Techniques ‐ Interaction Techniques; Systems and
Analytics Applications ‐ Analytics using Statistical packages‐Approaches to modeling in Analytics –
correlation, regression, decision trees, classification, association‐Intelligence from unstructured
information‐Text analytics‐Understanding of emerging trends and Technologies‐Industry challenges
and application of Analytics‐ Analyzing big data with twitter ‐ Big data for E‐Commerce Big data for
blogs ‐ Review of Basic Data Analytic Methods using R.
1. Data Analysis‐Visualization using R.
2. Map Reduce using Hadoop
3. In‐database Analytics
4. Implementation of Queries using Mongo DB
TEXT BOOKS
1 David Loshin, "Big Data Analytics: From Strategic Planning to Enterprise Integration with Tools,
Techniques, NoSQL, and Graph", 2013.
2 AnandRajaraman and Jeffrey David Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”, Cambridge University
Press, 2012
3 Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, “Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 EMC Education Services, "Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing,
Visualizing and Presenting Data", Wiley publishers, 2015.
2 Bart Baesens, "Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its
Applications", Wiley Publishers, 2015.
3 Kim H. Pries and Robert Dunnigan, "Big Data Analytics: A Practical Guide for Managers " CRC
Press, 2015
4 Jimmy Lin and Chris Dyer, "Data‐Intensive Text Processing with MapReduce", Synthesis Lectures
on Human Language Technologies, Vol. 3, No. 1, Pages 1‐177, Morgan Claypool publishers, 2010.
5 Chris Eaton, Dirk DeRoos, Tom Deutsch, George Lapis, Paul Zikopoulos, “Understanding Big Data:
Analytics for Enterprise Class Hadoop and Streaming Data”, McGrawHill Publishing, 2012.
123
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/introduction‐big‐data‐analytics‐coursera
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/big‐data
3 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/110106072/
COURSE TITLE APPLIED CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY CREDITS 4

CIA 50% ESE 50%
Identify various security threats and to develop a security model to prevent,
1 1,2,12
detect and recover from attacks
2 Perform Encrypt and decrypt messages using block ciphers. 2,3,12
Demonstrate techniques to Sign and verify messages using well‐known signature
3 1,2,3,12
generation and verification algorithms.
Develop code to implement a cryptographic algorithm or write an analysis report
4 2,3,4,12
on any existing security product
5 Demonstrate technologies that protect cipher space against security threats 2,3,12
6 Describe about system level security mechanisms 1,2,12
Prerequisites : Basics of Networks
MODULE 1: COMPUTER SECURITY BASICS (9L+3T)
Computer Security Concepts, OSI Security Architecture, Security Attacks, Security Services, Security
Mechanisms, Model for Network Security, Classical Encryption techniques‐ Substitution and
Transposition methods, Block Cipher Principles
MODULE 2: ENCRYPTION STANDARDS AND BLOCK CIPHER OPERATION (9L+3T)
Data Encryption Standard‐ DES Encryption‐ Initial Permutation‐ Details of Single Round‐ Key
Generation‐ DES Decryption, Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)‐ General Structure‐Detailed
Structure, AES Transformation Functions, Multiple Encryption and Triple DES‐ Double DES‐Triple DES
with Two Keys‐ Triple DES with Three Keys, Block Cipher Operation‐ Electronic Code Book‐ Cipher
Block Chaining Mode‐ Cipher Feedback Mode‐Output Feedback Mode‐ Counter Mode.
MODULE 3: AUTHENTICATION AND HASH FUNCTION (9L+3T)
RSA Algorithm, Diffie‐Hellman Key Exchange Algorithm, Applications of Cryptographic Hash Functions,
Message Authentication Code‐ Requirements‐Functions‐ Security, MACs Based on Hash Functions
(HMAC), MACs Based on Block Ciphers‐ Data Authentication Algorithm (DAA) – Cipher‐based Message
124
Authentication Code(CMAC) , Digital Signatures –Properties ‐ Attacks and Forgeries ‐ Requirements ‐

Direct Digital Signature, Digital Signature Standard
MODULE 4: NETWORK SECURITY (9L+3T)
Symmetric Key Distribution Using Symmetric Encryption, Symmetric Key Distribution Using
Asymmetric Encryption, Distribution of Public Keys‐ Public Announcement of Public Keys ‐Publicly
Available Directory ‐ Public‐Key Authority ‐ Public‐Key Certificates, Remote User‐Authentication
Principles, Remote User‐Authentication Using Symmetric Encryption, Kerberos, Remote User
Authentication Using Asymmetric Encryption.
MODULE 5: SYSTEM LEVEL SECURITY (9L+3T)
Wireless Network Security‐ Wireless LAN Overview ‐ Wireless LAN Security‐ Wireless Transport Layer
Security‐ WAP End‐to‐End Security, E‐mail Security – Pretty Good Privacy – Secure/Multipurpose
Internet Mail Extension (S/MIME), IP Security‐ Overview – Policy – Combining Security Associations,
Intruders‐ Malicious Software – Firewalls.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Behrouz A. Forouzan,”Cryptography and Network Security” 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill
Publications, 2016.
2 Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography, Second Edition”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 William Stallings,”Cryptography and Network Security ‐ Principles and Practice Paperback” –
PEARSON, Jun 2017.
2 Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, 2003
3 Charles B. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”, Third Edition, Pearson
Education, 2003.
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105031/1
125
COURSE TITLE PROGRAMMING PARADIGMS CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Compare various programming languages. 1,2
2 Explain the concepts of scripting languages 1,2
3 Describe various data types and statements in programming languages 1,2
4 Identify design issues and Implement subprograms. 2,3,12
5 Explain concurrency and exception handling in various programming languages. 3,12
6 Describe functional programming and logic programming. 1,2
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: EVOLUTION OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES (9)
Categories of Languages – Procedural languages: FORTRAN, BASIC, C, COBOL, ALGOL 68, PL/1‐Object
oriented Languages: ADA, SIMULA, Small Talk, C++, Java, C# ‐ Logic Programming: Prolog – Functional
Programming :LISP – Scripting languages.
MODULE 2: DATA TYPES AND STATEMENTS (9)
Primitive types, Character, string, arrays, associative arrays, record type, tuple, list, union, pointers –
Type checking ‐ Arithmetic and Boolean expressions‐ overloading of operators. Assignment
statements ‐Selection‐ Iteration‐Unconditional branching.
MODULE 3: SUB PROGRAMS AND IMPLEMENTATION (9)
Fundamentals of sub programs – design issues – local referencing environments– parameter passing
methods – overloaded sub programs – generic sub programs.
Implementation of sub programs – simple sub program – stack implementation – Nested sub
programs ‐ blocks – dynamic scope.
MODULE 4: CONCURRENCY AND EXCEPTION HANDLING (9)
Concurrency : Semapores – Monitors – Message passing – Concurrency in Ada, Java and C#.
Exception handling : Introduction – Exception handling in C++, Java, Python and Ruby.
MODULE 5: FUNCTIONAL AND LOGIC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES (9)
Functional Programming languages: Fundamentals of functional programming languages – LISP,
Common LISP, Scheme, Huskell, ML, F# ‐ Comparison of Functional and Imperative languages.
Logic Programming Languages: Introduction to predicate calculus – Theorem proving – Basic
elements of Prolog‐ Applications of Logic programming.
126
TEXT BOOKS
1 Robert W. Sebesta, “Concepts of Programming Languages”, Eleventh Edition, Pearson Education,
2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Kenneth A. Lambert and Kenneth C. Louden,”Programming Languages Principles and Practices”,
Cengage publications, 3/e, 2012
2 Ellis Horowitz, “Fundamentals of Programming Languages”, Springer , 2011
E BOOKS
https://cs444pnu1.files.wordpress.com/2014/02/concepts‐of‐programming‐languages‐10th‐
1
sebesta.pdf
MOOC
1 https://swayam.gov.in/courses/1357‐functional‐programming‐in‐haskell
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/programming‐languages‐part‐c‐coursera
COURSE TITLE CLOUD DEPLOYMENT LAB CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Summarize cloud and its techniques 1,2,12
2 Demonstrate different cloud delivery and deployment models 2,3,12
3 Illustrate cloud file systems and its related technologies 2,3,12
4 Recall the key features pertaining to cloud security 2,12
5 Use of various cloud tools 3,4,5,12
6 Give example of future cloud 2,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: CLOUD COMPUTING TECHIQUES (6L+6P)
Introduction to Cloud Computing, Definition, Characteristics, Components, Cloud provider, SLA,
Virtualization, Types of virtualization, Server virtualization, storage virtualization, Network
Virtualization and application virtualization, Importance of virtualization in cloud, Study of
hypervisors.
i. Create and run virtual machines using VMWare Workstation/Virtual Box.
ii. Creation of VM image of base operating system.
127
MODULE 2: CLOUD IMPLEMENTATIONS (6L+6P)

Cloud deployment models: Public cloud, Private cloud and Hybrid cloud, Cloud delivery models: IaaS,
PaaS, SaaS and others, Organizational scenarios of clouds, Administering & Monitoring cloud services,
benefits and limitations, Deploy application over cloud, Cloud computing platforms: Infrastructure as
a service: Amazon EC2, Platform as a Service: Google App Engine, Microsoft Azure, Utility Computing,
Elastic Computing.
i. Implement Infrastructure as a Service by using OpenStack.
ii. Implement Software as a Service by using OwnCloud.
MODULE 3: CLOUD FILE SYSTEMS ANDTECHNOLOGIES (6L+6P)
Cloud file systems: GFS and HDFS, BigTable, HBase and Dynamo, Map‐Reduce: The map‐Reduce
model, Cloud Architectures: Workload distribution, Resource pooling, dynamic scalability, elasticity,
Service load balancing, Cloud bursting, Service Technology: SOAP and REST Web services, AJAX and
mashups Web services, Service Middleware, Case Study examples.
i. Installation and creating virtual machine using Qemu.
ii. Using virtual machine with Qemu.
MODULE 4: CLOUD SECURITY (6L+6P)
Introduction to Cloud Security, General problems in cloud computing, Threats and vulnerabilities,
Architectural Design Considerations: Data Centre or Physical Security, Server Security, Network
Security, Application and Platform Security, Encryption and Key Management, Infrastructure Security,
Security Management, SSL in Cloud Computing, Identity and Access management.
i. Install and learn administrative features of ownCloud.
ii. Create, manage user and group of user accounts by ownCloud.
MODULE 5: CLOUD TOOLS AND FUTURE CLOUD (6L+6P)
Tools and Technologies for Cloud, Cloud Computing Platform: Eucalyptus, Nimbus, OpenNebula,
Cloud Mashups, Cloud Tools: VMWare, Eucalyptus, CloudSim, Implementing real time application
over cloud platform, QOS Issues in Cloud, data migration, streaming in Cloud, Concepts in Mobile
Cloud Computing, Fog Computing, Dockers, Green Cloud, Cloud Computing, IoT Cloud.
i. Case study on Amazon EC2.
ii. Case study on Microsoft Azure.
128
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Getting Started: MathWorks Managed Clusters , Get ready‐to‐use clusters with MATLAB
Parallel Cloud
2. Access Preconfigured Clusters in Amazon Web Services (AWS), Start customizable clusters
managed by MathWorks Cloud Center.
3. Analyze Large Data in Database stored in database Using Tall Arrays.
4. Creating a Cloud Based People Counter Using MATLAB
5. Visualizing the Density of a Data Cloud with MATLAB.
6. Scale Parallel MATLAB Applications to Amazon EC2 Using Cloud Center.
7. Parallel Computing with MATLAB and Simulink.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Thomas Erl, Zaigham Mahmood, and Ricardo Puttini,”Cloud Computing Concepts, Technology &
Architecture”, Prentice Hall, 2013.
2 A.Srinivasan,J.Suresh,”Cloud Computing, A practical approach for learning and
implementation”,Pearson,2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Barrie Sosinsky, “Cloud Computing Bible”, Wiley, 2011.
2 Cloud Computing: Principles and Paradigms, Editors: Rajkumar Buyya, James Broberg, Andrzej
M. Goscinski, Wiley,2011
3 Enterprise Cloud Computing ‐ Technology, Architecture, Applications, Gautam Shroff, Cambridge
University Press, 2010
E BOOKS
1 https://www.manning.com/books/exploring‐cloud‐computing
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/cloud‐computing‐applications‐part‐1‐cloud‐systems‐and‐
infrastructure‐coursera
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/cloud‐computing‐concepts‐part‐2‐coursera
129
SEMESTER VIII
COURSE TITLE PROJECT & VIVA - VOCE CREDITS 8

Course Code CSB4441 Course Category PC L-T-P-S 0-0-24-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5 ASSESSMENT MODEL LE
The student should be able to
1,2,3,4,
1 Demonstrate a model / concept / system by applying the theoretical and
5,6
practical knowledge gained through the course of study.
Prerequisites : Nil
The objective of the project work is to enable the students in convenient groups of not more than 4
members on a project involving theoretical and experimental studies related to the computer science
engineering. Every project work shall have a supervisor who is the member of the faculty of the
institution. Six periods per week shall be allotted in the time table and this time shall be utilized by the
students to receive the directions from the supervisor on library reading, laboratory work, computer
analysis or field work as assigned by the supervisor and also to present in periodical seminars on the
progress made in the project.
A student will have to defend his project/thesis and credit will be given on the merit of viva‐voce
examination.
Assessment Model: LE
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 20%
Second Review 20%
Third Review 20%
Report 20%
Final Viva‐ Voce 20%
TOTAL 100%
130
LIST OF DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES - SEMESTER III
COURSE TITLE SYSTEM SOFTWARE CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSC4251 COURSE CATEGORY PE L-T-P-S 3-0-0- 0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Explain the basic architecture of a hypothetical machine. 1,2
2 Apply one pass and two assembler algorithms and generate object code. 2
3 Describe loader and linker functionalities 1,2
4 Apply Macros in assembly languages 2,3
5 Demonstrate document editing tools 3
6 Illustrate the working principles of 4GL 2,3
Prerequisites : Microprocessor and Computer Architecture
System software and machine architecture – The Simplified Instructional Computer (SIC) & SIC/XE ‐
Machine architecture ‐ Data and instruction formats ‐ addressing modes ‐ instruction sets ‐ I/O and
programming.
MODULE 2: ASSEMBLERS (9)
Basic assembler functions ‐ A simple SIC assembler – Assembler algorithm and data structures ‐ Machine
dependent assembler features ‐ Instruction formats and addressing modes – Program relocation ‐
Machine independent assembler features ‐ Literals – Symbol‐defining statements – Expressions ‐ One pass
assemblers and Multi pass assemblers ‐ Implementation example ‐ MASM assembler.
MODULE 3: LOADERS AND LINKERS (9)
Basic loader functions ‐ Design of an Absolute Loader – A Simple Bootstrap Loader ‐ Machine dependent
loader features ‐ Relocation – Program Linking – Algorithm and Data Structures for Linking Loader ‐
Machine‐independent loader features ‐ Automatic Library Search – Loader Options ‐ Loader design
options ‐ Linkage Editors – Dynamic Linking – Bootstrap Loaders ‐ Implementation example ‐ MSDOS
linker..
MODULE 4: MACRO PROCESSORS AND SYSTEM SOFTWARE TOOLS (9)
Basic macro processor functions ‐ Macro Definition and Expansion – Macro Processor Algorithm and data
structures ‐ Machine‐independent macro processor features ‐ Concatenation of Macro Parameters –
Generation of Unique Labels – Conditional Macro Expansion – Keyword Macro Parameters‐Macro within
Macro‐Implementation example ‐ MASM Macro Processor – ANSI C Macro language ‐ Text editors ‐
Overview of the Editing Process ‐ User Interface – Editor Structure. ‐ Interactive debugging systems ‐
Debugging functions and capabilities.
131
MODULE 5: 4GL AND PYTHON (9)

Fourth Generation Programming Language‐Types‐General use/versatile ‐Database Query languages‐
Report Generators‐Data manipulation, analysis, and reporting languages‐ GUI creators – Database driven
GUI application development‐Domain Specific Programming Languages‐Rapid Application Development‐
Fifth generation Programming Languages‐python interpreter‐program execution‐executing code from a
file‐Interpreter and complier‐Python compiler internals.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Leland L. Beck, “System Software – An Introduction to Systems Programming”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 D. M. Dhamdhere, “Systems Programming and Operating Systems”, Second Revised Edition, Tata
McGraw‐Hill, 1999.
2 http://www.pasteur.fr/formation/infobio/python/ch14.html#sect_module
3 http://tomlee.co/wp‐content/uploads/2012/11/108_python‐language‐internals.pdf
E BOOKS
1 https://www.kopykitab.com/index.php?route=product/search&q=System+Software+Notes+eBook
2 http://www.faadooengineers.com/#
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108107029/module6/lecture36.pdf
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106092/2
132
COURSE TITLE COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Apply algorithms to draw fundamental drawings 2,3,12
2 Illustrate objects using 3D 3,4
Analyze the effects of perspective and orthographic projections of scenes in 3D
3 3,4
space.
4 Summarize various Multimedia applications. 2,3,4
5 Identify File format standards. 2
6 Compare different hypertext multimedia facilities. 2
MODULE 1: OUTPUT PRIMITIVES (9)
Introduction ‐ Line ‐ Curve and Ellipse Drawing Algorithms – Attributes – Two‐Dimensional Geometric
Transformations – Two‐Dimensional Clipping and Viewing.
MODULE 2: THREE-DIMENSIONAL CONCEPTS (9)
Three‐Dimensional Object Representations – Three‐Dimensional Geometric and Modeling
Transformations – Three‐Dimensional Viewing – Color models – Parallel and perspective projection.
Suggested reading :http://www.nptelvideos.com/video.php?id=959&c=10
MODULE 3: MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS DESIGN (9)
An Introduction – Multimedia applications – Multimedia System Architecture – Evolving technologies
for Multimedia – Defining objects for Multimedia systems – Multimedia Data interface standards –
Multimedia Databases.
MODULE 4: MULTIMEDIA FILE HANDLING (9)
Compression & Decompression – Data & File Format standards – Multimedia I/O technologies ‐ Digital
voice and audio – Video image and animation – Full motion video – Storage and retrieval
Technologies.
MODULE 5: HYPERMEDIA (9)
Multimedia Authoring & User Interface – Hypermedia messaging ‐ Mobile Messaging – Hypermedia
message component – Creating Hypermedia message – Integrated multimedia message standards –
Integrated Document management – Distributed Multimedia Systems.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Donald Hearn and M.Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, Pearson Education, 2003.
2 Prabat K Andleigh and Kiran Thakrar, “Multimedia Systems and Design”, PHI, 2003 .
133
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Judith Jeffcoate, “Multimedia in practice technology and Applications”, PHI, 1998.
2 Foley, Vandam, Feiner, Huges, “Computer Graphics: Principles & Practice”, Pearson Education,
second edition 2003.
3 Darryl Gove, “Multicore Application Programming for Windows, Linux, and Oracle Solaris”,
Pearson, 2011.
E BOOKS
http://edu.uokufa.edu.iq/staff/dr.nidhal/compressed%20comp.book/Hearn,Baker%20‐
1
%20Computer%20Graphics%20‐%20C%20Version%202nd%20Ed.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/interactive‐computer‐graphics
2 https://in.udacity.com/course/interactive‐3d‐graphics‐‐cs291
COURSE TITLE IT INFRASTRUCTURE AND MANAGEMENT CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSC4253 COURSE CATEGORY EE L-T-P-S 3-0-0- 0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Recognize various Database types and Storage technologies. 1,2
2 Identify suitable Server Technologies for Deployment. 1,2,3
3 Classify various Directory services for the server. 2,3
4 Formulate appropriate network security techniques for Database. 2,3
5 Summarize middle ware technologies. 1,2,3
6 Explain about common messaging systems 1,2
Prerequisites: Knowledge about Network Components & Architecture.
MODULE 1: DATABASE& STORAGE OVERVIEW (9)

Understanding Database types, SQL, JDBC, Indexing, Database clustering replication. Storage
Networking Technology, Types of storage system, FC‐ AL, FABRIC, Storage Area Networks, Zones,
Storage virtualization.
MODULE 2: SYSTEMS OVERVIEW (9)

Server Technology (Rack, Blades, Enterprise, HPC), Operating systems, Virtualization ( Hypervisors ,
Partitioning, VMs, I/O Virtualization), Server Deployment (Physical and Virtual), Server Management
console, Server Availability concepts and techniques. Server workloads.
134
MODULE 3: DIRECTORY SERVICES OVERVIEW (9)

Directory Server concepts, LDAP protocol, LDAP replication topologies, LDIF data exchange
MODULE 4: NETWORK& SECURITY OVERVIEW (9)
Networking overview ‐ Topologies, Switching and Routing concepts, Firewalls and security zones,
VLANs. Security basics, Cryptography & PKI basics, Identity & Access Management, Data security,
Storage Security, Network Security (Firewalls,IDS/IPS), Server security ‐ Configuration control & patch
management, Firewalls , Physical Security, Security Operations Center concepts, Virtualization
Security.
MODULE 5: APPLICATION AND MIDDLEWARE OVERVIEW (9)
Introduction to common Messaging Systems (MQSeries), Web tiered deployment, Application
Servers & Clustered deployment, E‐mail (Lotus Notes / exchange). Understanding Data warehouse
concepts, Data Warehouse Architectures, Logical Design, Physical Design.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 IT Systems Management: Designing”, Schiesser, Pearson Education India, 2 edition (2015)
2 IT Infrastructure and its Management ‐ A Conceptual Approach”, S.C.Mourya , Technical
Publications (2014)
3 IT Infrastructure & Its Management by Gupta, Tata McGraw‐Hill Education, 2010
4 Remote Infrastructure Management by Lambert M. Tennoe Mariam T. Henssonow Susan F.
Surhone.
5 IT Infrastructure Management by Anita Sengar.2012.
E BOOKS
http://www.tepictlatoani.org/download‐pdf‐it‐infrastructure‐its‐management‐book‐by‐tata‐
1
mcgraw‐hill‐education.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.udemy.com/courses/search/?q=it%20infrastructure&src=ukw
2 https://swayam.gov.in/courses/4722‐july‐2018‐data‐base‐management‐systems
135
COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO OPEN SOURCE STANDARDS CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Gain knowledge on Open Source Software and Open Standards 1,2
2 Outline various adoption methods for Open Standards 1,2
3 Discover the evolution of Open Source Software &Standards 1,2
4 Identify the Open Source Communities and their Contributions 2,3
5 Examine the Open Standards with the help of Case Studies. 2,3
Extend the gained knowledge on Open Standards to deal with Open Source
6 3,4,5,12
Software
Prerequisites :
Introduction to Standards ‐ Types of Standards ‐Open Standard ‐Closed Standard
Evolution of Standards ‐ Life Cycle‐ Importance of Standards and Benefits of Open Standards ‐
Standard Organizations.
MODULE 2: ADOPTION OF OPEN STANDARDS (9)
Introduction ‐ Drivers of Adoption ‐ Adoption Methods and Process ‐ examples of Open Standard
Adoptions in the World ‐Adoption Barriers ‐ Early adopter
Major Principles of Open Standards ‐ Openness, Consensus, Due Process, Open IPR, Open World, Open
Access, Open meetings, Ongoing support, Open interfaces, Open use
Drivers for Adoption ‐ Lower cost of ownership, Quality, Innovation reuse, Technical competence;
Open Source Software Assessment, Examples of Open Source Adoption in the World, Open Source
Challenges.
MODULE 3: OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE (9)
Introduction to Open Source Software ‐ History of Open Source Software ‐ Initiation of Open Source
project start ‐ Open Source Software examples : The Origins, The GNU projects, The Operating System
GNU/Linux, The Graphical User Interface KDE/GNOME, Apache Web Server, Application Software;
Strengths and Advantages of Open Source Software ‐ Network effects, Lower cost, Availability,
Maintainability..
MODULE 4: OPEN SOURCE COMMUNITIES AND DEVELOPMENT PROCESS (9)

Open Source Initiative (OSI) ‐ Open Source definition; Free Software foundation; Open Source
development process – Call for Contributions, MythBuster, Brook’s law; Open Source Community;
Apache Web Server; Apache Software Foundation (ASF); How to contribute to Open source projects.
136
MODULE 5: CASE STUDY (9)

Introduction; Open Standards Case Study 1 ‐ Mozilla, Open Standards Case Study 2 ‐ Linux
TEXT BOOKS
1 Open Source Intelligence Tools and Resources Handbook by Aleksandra Bielska, Natalie
Anderson, Vytenis Benetis, Cristina Viehman, 2018.
2 Open Source Intelligence Methods and Tools: A Practical Guide to Online Intelligence by Nihad
Hassan, Rami Hijazi, 2018
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Handbook of Research on Open Source Software: Technological, Economic, and Social
Perspectives by Kirk St. Amant and Brian Still ‐ IGI Global © 2007
2 Open Source: Technology and Policy by Fadi P. Deek and James A. M. McHugh
Cambridge University Press © 2008.
3 Perspectives on Free and Open Source Software by Joseph Feller, Brian Fitzgerald, Scott A.
Hissam and Karim R. Lakhani (eds) The MIT Press © 2005.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.univasf.edu.br/~brauliro.leal/download/HandbookofOpenSourceTools.pdf
https://www.i‐intelligence.eu/wp‐content/uploads/2018/06/OSINT_Handbook_June‐
2
2018_Final.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/open‐source‐tools‐for‐data‐science
2 https://www.udemy.com/open‐source‐video‐editing‐b/
137
COURSE TITLE INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Explain the art and science of creating a model for information 1,2
2 Articulate the art and science of creating a model for information 1,2,3
3 Take up research to resolve existing issues in Information Architecture 3,4,12
4 Design an interactive Information Architecture 3,4
Apply the Information Architecture practice to address an information design
5 3,4,12
problem.
Develop Information Architecture for different target groups, demographics and
6 3,4,12
business objectives
Prerequisites :
MODULE 1: INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE AND WEB 2.0 (9)
Information architecture concepts ‐ Definition‐ The evolution of the web and web design, Information
architecture and web 2.0 ‐ Changing the web world wide web ‐generations of web ‐web 2.0
MODULE 2: INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE AND RESEARCH (9)
Challenges and opportunities of IA and design community ‐ Information architecture Research ‐ Design
and evaluation‐Organization ‐ Logical organization ‐ Semantic Organization.
MODULE 3: INTERACTION DESIGN (9)
Navigation systems ‐ User information behavior and design implications ‐ Understanding user needs
and information behavior ‐ Theories and principles ‐ Design implications, Design Components ‐
Interaction design principles ‐ Personalization and customization.
MODULE 4: ENTERPRISE IA AND IA IN PRACTICE (9)
Enterprise information architecture ‐ Online workspace aggregation ‐ Practicing information
architecture.
MODULE 5: GLOBAL INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE (9)
The need for internationalization and Localization ‐ Cross culture theories and localization ‐ Guidelines
for global IA and user experience design , The future of information architecture, The IA community‐
Challenges in IA architects.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Ding, W. and X. Lin (2010). Information architecture and Web 2.0. In Information Architecture:
The Design and Integration of Information Spaces (pp. 7‐21). San Rafae: Morgan & Claypool
Publishers
2 Wei Ding, Xia Lin Information Architecture: The Design and Integration of Information Spaces
Synthesis Lectures on Information Concepts, Retrieval, and Services 2009, International Drexel
University
138
COURSE TITLE ERP AND ENTERPRISE DOMAINS CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Explain the basic concepts and need of ERP. 1,2
2 Summarize the role of ERP in business engineering. 1,2,9
3 Build the business model for any given application. 2, 3, 9
4 Implement ERP framework in real time environment. 1,2,3
5 Make use of emerging trends in ERP. 1,2,5,12
6 Demonstrate SAP architecture and develop small applications using SAP. 3,5,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO ERP (9)
Integrated Management Information Seamless Integration – Supply Chain Management – Integrated
Data Model – Benefits of ERP – Business Engineering and ERP – Definition of Business Engineering –
Principle of Business Engineering – Business Engineering with Information Technology.
Suggested reading :
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105083/10
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105083/18
MODULE 2: BUSINESS MODELLING FOR ERP (9)

Building the Business Model – ERP Implementation – An Overview – Role of Consultant, Vendors and
Users, Customization – Precautions – ERP Post Implementation Options‐ERP Implementation
Technology –Guidelines for ERP implementation.
MODULE 3: ERP IMPLEMENTATION (9)
Planning Evaluation and selection of ERP system, Implementation life cycle, Methodology and
Framework, Training –Data Migration.
Suggested reading: https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107238/60
MODULE 4: EMERGING TRENDS IN ERP (9)
ERP & E‐business, ERP, Internet& www‐ ERP‐II, Future Direction and Trends in ERP, ERP TOOLS‐ JD
Edwards, Enterprise One Microsoft Dynamics, CRM Module.
Suggested reading: https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105083/15
MODULE 5: SAP ARCHITECTURE (9)
Basic Architectural Concepts – The System Control Interfaces – Services – Presentation Interface –
Database Interface, SAP S/4 HANA
Suggested reading: http://nptelvideos.com/sap/
139
TEXT BOOKS
1 Alexis Leon, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Vinod Kumar Garg and N.K.Venkita Krishnan, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts and
Practice”, PHI, 2011
2 Alexis Leon, ERP demystified, second Edition Tata McGraw‐Hill, 2007.
3 Mahadeo Jaiswal, Ganesh Vanapalli, “Textbook of Enterprise Resource Planning”, Macmillan
Publishers India, 2005.
4 Jose Antonio Fernandz, Franklin Martinez and Jim Keogh, “The SAP R/3 Handbook”, Third
Edition, McGraw‐Hill Education, 2006.
E BOOKS
1 https://bookboon.com/en/a‐guide‐to‐erp‐ebook
MOOC
1 www.sap.com/solutions/business‐suite/erp/index.epx
2 https://www.udemy.com/introduction‐to‐erp‐systems/
140
LIST OF DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES – SEMESTER IV
COURSE TITLE MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Appreciate the Mobility landscape 1,2,3,12
2 Familiarize with Mobile apps development aspects 1,2,3,12
Design and develop mobile apps, using Android as development platform, with 1,2,3,12
3 key focus on user experience design, native data handling and background tasks
and notifications.
Appreciation of nuances such as native hardware play, location awareness, 1,2,3,12
4
graphics, and multimedia.
5 Perform testing, signing, packaging and distribution of mobile apps 1,2,3,12
Prerequisites : Exposure to Java (J2SE) and basic RDBMS
MODULE 1: GETTING STARTED WITH MOBILITY (6)
Mobility landscape, Mobile platforms, Mobile apps development, Overview of Android platform,
setting up the mobile app development environment along with an emulator, a case study on Mobile
app development.
MODULE 2: BUILDING BLOCKS OF MOBILE APPS (15)
App user interface designing – mobile UI resources (Layout, UI elements, Draw‐able, Menu), Activity‐
states and life cycle, interaction amongst activities. App functionality beyond user interface ‐ Threads,
Async task, Services – states and life cycle, Notifications, Broadcast receivers, Telephony and SMS APIs
Native data handling – on‐device file I/O, shared preferences, mobile databases such as SQLite, and
enterprise data access (via Internet/Intranet).
Suggested reading :www.appmachine.com/tour/building-blocks/
MODULE 3: SPRUCING UP MOBILE APPS (8)
Graphics and animation – custom views, canvas, animation APIs, multimedia – audio/video playback
and record, location awareness, and native hardware access (sensors such as accelerometer and
gyroscope).
Suggested reading:https://www.theserverside.com/tutorial/Mobile‐application‐development‐
tutorial.
MODULE 4: TESTING MOBILE APPS (5)
Debugging mobile apps, White box testing, Black box testing, and test automation of mobile apps,
JUnit for Android, Robotium, MonkeyTalk.
Suggested reading :www.softwaretestinghelp.com/beginners‐guide‐to‐mobile‐application‐testing/
141
MODULE 5: TAKING APPS TO MARKET (2)

Versioning, signing and packaging mobile apps, distributing apps on mobile market place
Suggested reading : https://www.tutorialspoint.com › Mobile Marketing › Mobile Apps Marketing
Strategies
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Leigh Williamson, John Ponzo, Patrick Bohrer, “Swift in the Cloud”, Wiley Publications, 1st
edition, 2017.
2 HazemSaleh, “JavaScript Mobile Application Development”, Packt Publishing 2014
E BOOKS
1 http://martinfowler.com/agile.html
2 www.it‐ebooks.info/tag/agile
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/browse/computer‐science/mobile‐and‐web‐development
2 https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐mobile‐application‐hkustx‐comp107x‐2
COURSE TITLE NET FRAMEWORK AND PROGRAMMING CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Explain the basis of .Net framework. 1,2
2 Develop C# program based on the features of .Net Framework. 2,3
3 experiment and examine runtime errors using exception Handling 3,4
4 Develop simple applications under .Net framework. 3,4,12
5 Develop Database Applications Using ADO.Net 3,4,12
6 Build Web based Applications using .Net programming languages. 3,4,12
Prerequisites : Computer Programming
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO .NET (9L+3P)
What is .NET, Why .NET, Advantages of .NET, Architecture of .NET, Introduction to CLR, CLR
architecture, Just‐in‐time compiler (JIT), Microsoft Intermediate Language (MSIL), Understanding IL
with ILDASM, .NET Framework, common class library, common type system (CTS), common language
specifications (CLS), Languages under .NET, Working with Microsoft Visual studio IDE.
Study of .NET IDE framework
142
MODULE 2: OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING C# (9L+3P)

Explain features and phases of the object‐oriented approach, Write and execute C# programs, Use
decision‐making constructs and loop constructs, Implement structures, enumerations, arrays, and
collections, Implement polymorphism and overload functions and operators, Explain and use
delegates and events , Use various stream classes to implement file handling.
Array, string and structures using C#
Object Oriented programming concepts
Exception Handling Mechanism
MODULE 3: GUI APPLICATIONS DEVELOPMENT USING .NET FRAMEWORK (9L+3P)
Work with the Windows Forms and controls, Perform validation of controls using classes and controls
, Work with Dialog Boxes, Menus and MDI Application, Implement Printing and Reporting
Functionality in a Windows Forms Application, Package and deploy applications.
Simple online registration form using Windows forms and Controls
MODULE 4: DEVELOPING DATABASE APPLICATIONS USING ADO.NET (9L+3P)
Create and manage connections using ADO.NET, Identify the disconnected and connected
environment in ADO.NET, Create datasets and data tables, Retrieve and store large binary data,
Perform bulk copy operations , Execute SQL notification maintain and update a cache, Read, write,
validate, and modify XML data using XML reader and writer classes.
Payroll Processing Application
MODULE 5: DEVELOPING WEB APPLICATIONS USING ASP.NET (9L+3P)
Create a Web Application, Program a Web Application, Add and Configure Server Controls, Create a
Common Layout by Using Master Pages, Manage State for a Web Application , Access and Display
Data, Control Access to a Web Application , Deploy a Web Application, Build Dynamic Web
Applications, Create Controls for Web Applications, ASP.NET MVC.
Simple ASP.Net web application using web controls
Session tracking using user authentication
TEXT BOOKS
1 Andrew Troelsen, “Pro C# 10 and the .NET 4 Platform”, 5th Edition, Apress, 2010.
2 Bill Evjen, Scott Hanselman, Devin Rader, “Professional ASP.NET 3.5: In C# and VB (Programmer
to Programmer)”, Wrox Publications, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Eric Butow and Tommy Ryan, “C# Your Visual Blueprint for building .NET Applications”, Visual
Publications, 2001.
2 Danny Ryan and Tommy Ryan, “ASP.NET Your Visual Blueprint for building Web on the .NET
Framework”, Visual Publisher, 2001.
3 Peter Wright, Beginning Visual C# 2005 Express Edition: From Novice to Professional, Apress,
2006.
4 Christian Nagelet et al, Professional C# 2005, Wiley Publishing, 2006.
5 Fritz Onion, Keith Brown, Essential ASP.NET 2.0, Addison Wesley, 2006.
143
COURSE TITLE LINUX INTERNALS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSC4269 COURSE CATEGORY PE L-T-P-S 2-0-2-0
CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Install LINUX OS. 1,4,6,9
2 Manage the user accounts. 1,4,6,9
3 Setup environment for internet and intranet services. 1,4,6,9
4 Write Shell Programming for various functionalities required for the applications 1,4,6,9
Prerequisites : basic OS concepts
MODULE 1: INSTALLING LINUX AS A SERVER (9L+3P)
History of Linux operating system ‐ Difference between windows 2000 and Linux distribution ‐
Installing Linux in a server configuration ‐ Dual booting issues ‐ methods of installation ‐ GNOME and
KDE ‐ Xwindows system ‐ KDE Basics ‐ Installing software.
1. Installation of RedHat Linux
2. Write script to print the message “Hello” on the console
3. Write script to perform following basic math operation as
(a) Addition
(b) Subtraction
(c) Multiplication
(d) Division
MODULE 2: SINGLE - HOST ADMINISTRATION (9L+3P)
Managing users – User properties – user database – utilize user management tools setUID & getUID ‐
Command Line – Booting and Shutting down –Boot loaders, GRUB, Bootstrapping ‐ File System – Core
System services – Compiling Linux kernel Securing an individual server.
1. Setting up the UID
2. Write the script to display current date, time, username and currency directory
3. Write the shell script to show various system configurations like
(a) Currently logged user and his long name
(b) Current Shell
(c) Your home directory
(d) Your operating system type
(e) Your current path settings
(f) Your current Working directory
144
MODULE 3: INTERNET SERVICES (9L+3P)

Internet Services ‐ understanding naming services ‐ BIND configuration file and database file ‐ DNS ‐
FTP ‐Setting up web server using Apache ‐ SMTP ‐ Install, configure and run postfix server ‐POP ‐
conflicts between pop and other protocols‐ SSH public key Cryptography ‐ creating a secure tunnel.
1. Set up SSH keys so you can connect to your neighbour's machine without having to enter a
password.
2. Make a list of open (listening) ports on your machine.
3. Make a backup copy of your home directory in /var/tmp on your neighbour's “backup
server,” using scp. Archive and compress before starting the data transfer! Connect to the
remote host using ssh, unpack the backup, and put one file back on the original machine
using sftp.
MODULE 4: INTRANET SERVICES (9L+3P)
Intranet Services ‐ NFS ‐ enable and configure NFS server and client ‐ NIS ‐ configure NIS Client – setup
secondary NIS server ‐ NIS tools ‐ SAMBA ‐ Administrating samba Printing ‐ Install cups ‐ add and
manage print jobs ‐ DHCP network configuration configure network interfaces ‐ use routers.
1. From your local workstation, display a graphical application, such as xclock on your neighbour's
screen. The necessary accounts will have to be set up. Use a secure connection!
2. Send an E‐mail to your local account. Try two different ways to send and read it. How can you
check that it really arrived?
3. Display network information for your workstation: IP address, routes, name servers.
MODULE 5: LINUX PROCESS CONTROL & SHELL PROGRAMMING (9L+3P)

Linux process environment ‐ login process ‐ parent child relationship ‐ process variable process
monitoring ‐invoking foreground and background process ‐ terminating process Daemons ‐
Introduction to Shell programming ‐ Shell scripts ‐ executing shell scripts creating scripts ‐ simple
examples.
1. Write a shell script to convert the contents of a given file from uppercase to lowercase and also
count the number of lines, words and character of the resultant file.
2. Write a shell script to list the files arranged in descending order of their size
3. Write a shell script to find the reverse of a given number
4. Write a shell to print the pattern
1
2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4 4
145
TEXT BOOKS
1 Steven Graham, Steve Shah ,"Linux Administration A Beginners Guide" ,3rd edition,
Dreamtech press ,2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 McKinnon, McKinnon, "Installing and Administrating Linux ", 2nd edition,Wiley Dreamtech, 2002
2 Sandip Bhattacharya, Panancrazio De Mauro,ShishirGundavaram, Mark Mamone,Kapil Sharma,
Deepak Thomas,Simon Whiting "Beginning Red Hat Linux 9 ", 5th edition , Wiley Dreamtech.
,2003
E BOOKS
1 http://www.worldcat.org/title/linux‐internals/oclc/704568240
MOOC
1 nptel.ac.in/courses/106108101/20
COURSE TITLE AGILE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1. Explain the background and driving forces for taking an Agile approach to
1,2
software development
2. recognize the business value of adopting Agile approaches 2,3
3. Drive development with unit tests using Test Driven Development 3,4
4. Apply design principles and refactoring to achieve Agility 3,4
5. Deploy automated build tools, version control and continuous integration 3,4,5,12
6. Perform testing activities within an Agile project 3,4,12
Prerequisites : Basics of Software Engineering Concepts and Waterfall Methodology and OOPs
MODULE 1 – FUNDAMENTALS OF AGILE (9L+3P)
The Genesis of Agile, Introduction and background, Agile Manifesto and Principles, Overview of
Scrum, Extreme Programming, Feature Driven development, Lean Software Development, Agile
project management, Design and development practices in Agile projects, Test Driven Development,
Continuous Integration, Refactoring, Pair Programming, Simple Design, User Stories, Agile Testing,
Agile Tools.
Design a customer preview following agile manifesto
Suggested reading :https://www.tutorialspoint.com/agile/index.htm
146
MODULE2 – AGILE SCRUM FRAMEWORK (9L+3P)

Introduction to Scrum, Project phases, Agile Estimation, Planning game, Product backlog, Sprint
backlog, Iteration planning, User story definition, Characteristics and content of user stories,
Acceptance tests and Verifying stories, Project velocity, Burn down chart, Sprint planning and
retrospective, Daily scrum, Scrum roles – Product Owner, Scrum Master, Scrum Team, Scrum case
study, Tools for Agile project management.
Showcase the sprints planning in banking application
Suggested reading :https://www.tutorialspoint.com/scrum/index.htm
MODULE 3 -AGILE TESTING (9L+3P)

The Agile lifecycle and its impact on testing, Test‐Driven Development (TDD), xUnit framework and
tools for TDD, Testing user stories ‐ acceptance tests and scenarios, Planning and managing testing
cycle, Exploratory testing, Risk based testing, Regression tests, Test Automation, Tools to support the
Agile tester
Demonstrate the quality of an application using agile TDD tools.
Suggested reading :https://www.tutorialspoint.com/agile_testing/index.htm
MODULE 4 – CORBA (9L+3P)

Agile design practices, Role of design Principles including Single Responsibility Principle, Open Closed
Principle, Liskov Substitution Principle, Interface Segregation Principles, Dependency Inversion
Principle in Agile Design, Need and significance of Refactoring, Refactoring Techniques, Continuous
Integration, Automated build tools, Version control.
Demonstrate how refactoring technique works for the changes need to be adopted in banking
application.
Suggested reading: https://searchsoftwarequality.techtarget.com/tutorial/Agile-software-
development-tutorial-Agile-project-management-tools.
MODULE 5 – INDUSTRY TRENDS (9L+3P)

Market scenario and adoption of Agile, Agile ALM, Roles in an Agile project, Agile applicability, Agile
in Distributed teams, Business benefits, Challenges in Agile, Risks and Mitigation, Agile projects on
Cloud, Balancing Agility with Discipline, Agile rapid development technologies.
Design and Demonstrate the complete banking software on customer end application using agile.
Suggested reading :https://docs.oracle.com/en/cloud/paas/developer-cloud/csdcs/using-agile-
methodology-oracle-developer-cloud-service.html#GUID-F4B9AAE1-EEB4-49DC-979C-
60623BB39024
147
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Ken Schawber, Mike Beedle, “Agile Software Development with Scrum”, PearsonPublications,
2008.
2 Robert C. Martin, “Agile Software Development, Principles, Patterns and Practices”, Prentice Hall
Publications, 2002.
3 Lisa Crispin, Janet Gregory, “Agile Testing: A Practical Guide for Testers and Agile Teams”,
Addison Wesley Publications, 2008.
4 Alistair Cockburn, “Agile Software Development: The Cooperative Game”, Addison Wesley
Publications, 2006.
5 Mike Cohn, “User Stories Applied: For Agile Software”, Addison Wesley Publications, 2004.
E BOOKS
1 http://martinfowler.com/agile.html
2 www.it‐ebooks.info/tag/agile
MOOC
2 https://www.coursera.org/courses?languages=en&query=agile
3 nptel.ac.in/courses/106101061/26
148
ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING WITH

COURSE TITLE FRAMEWORKS CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Outline the importance of core java platform 1,2
2 Write web applications using Servlet and JSP. 2,3,4
3 Create simple business logic for enterprise applications using EJB. 3,4,5,12
4 Create simple enterprise application using struts framework 3,4
Create and deploy web applications using eclipse IDE and create Database
5 3,4,12
connectivity using Hibernate.
6 Create and deploy web applications. 4,5,12
Prerequisites :
MODULE 1: CORE JAVA EE (9L+3T)
Java EE 5 Platform Overview ‐ Java EE Platform – Distributed Multi‐tiered Applications ‐ Web and
Business Components ‐ Java EE Containers – services & types ‐ Application Assembly and Deployment–
Packaging Applications ‐Getting Started with Web Applications – Application Deployment –Web
application development and deployment Steps ‐ Configuring Web application – Web application
deployment descriptor (web.xml file) ‐ Web Application Archive (*.WAR file) – *.WAR directory
structure ‐ Building & Deploying Applications, Ant build tool ‐ Advanced Java EE – Web &Business
Components Development.
Develop web application that demonstrates how to dynamically change the display language based
on user preference., Develop and configure a simple website(html site)
MODULE 2: SERVLETS & JSP (9L+3T)
Servlet Overview ‐ Life cycle of Servlet ‐ Handling Client HTTP Request and Server HTTP Response
Practical (Hands‐on Working Examples) ‐ Initializing Parameters and Servlet Context ‐ Initializing a
Servlet – Servlet Context initialization Parameters – Servlet Context Attributes (Context binder)‐
Session Management, Request Dispatcher & Redirecting ‐ Overview of JSP ‐ JSP Architecture &
lifecycle ‐ Components of Java Server Pages ‐ Implicit Objects & Standard JSP Tags ‐ Scope of JSP
objects.
Create registration and login form using JSP, Write a program to send email using Servlet
149
MODULE 3: ENTERPRISE JAVA BEANS (9L+3T)

EJB overview & Architecture ‐ About Session Beans ‐ Persistence Programming Model –Session
beans: Stateless and Stateful – Entity beans – CMP and BMP – Message Driven Beans Java EE
Application Assembly and Deployment – Anatomy of EJB Module & Packaging ‐ Java Persistence API ‐
Designing a Java Enterprise Application.
Write an example program for Simple Business Interface using Statefull and Stateless EJB, write an
example of Invoking a 3.0 Entity from a Session Bean
MODULE 4: STRUTS (9L+3T)
Struts Framework: Basics & Architecture – Request Handling Life Cycle ‐ Building a simple struts–
Configuration, Actions, Interceptors, Results, Value Stack/OGNL Struts2 Tag LibrariesStruts2 XML
Based Validations ‐ Database Access.
Create a login application using Action Form, Write a program to retrieve the value which is set in the
JSP Page in the case of Dynamic Action Form
MODULE 5: HIBERNATE AND IDE (9L+3T)
Introduction to Hibernate, ORM Overview, Hibernate Environment ‐ Hibernate Architecture &API,
Hibernate Configuration, Hibernate Sessions, Persistent Class & Mapping Files ‐ Building Hibernate
application, Hibernate Query Language (HQL) ‐ Hibernate O/R Mappings – Collection &Association
Mappings‐Hibernate Annotations Eclipse‐overview –installation‐perspectives‐
workspacescreatingprojects‐packages‐classes‐interfaces‐java build path – run configuration –running
program‐creating JAR files‐debugging programs and configurations‐installing plugins developing
application using Eclipse.
Demonstrate Hibernate using XML in Eclipse
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jim Keogh, “The Complete Reference J2EE”, Tata McGraw – Hill Edition 2002.
2 James Holmes, “The Complete References Struts”, 2ndEdition, Tata McGraw, 2007.
4 Jusin Couch, Daniel H. Steinberg, “J2EE Bible” Wily India (P) Ltd, New Delhi 2002.
5 Paul Tremblett, “Instant Enterprise Java Y‐Beans”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.idt.mdh.se/kurser/cd5480/2003/lectures/j2ee1_3tutorial.pdf
2 http://www.tutorialspoint.com/eclipse/index.htm
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/concurrent‐programming‐java‐coursera
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/java‐servlets‐and‐jsp‐build‐java‐eejee‐app‐25‐steps‐
simpliv
150
COURSE TITLE MIDDLEWARE TECHNOLOGIES CREDITS 3

CIA 60% ESE 40%
1 Discuss the different types of server client concepts 1, 2,3
2 Illustrate the design of EJB architecture 1, 2,4,5
3 Deploy EJB for specific applications 1, 3,5
4 Build an application using CORBA 1, 2,3.4,5
5 Build an application using COM 1, 3,4,5
6 Summarize various Middle ware Technologies. 1,2,4
Prerequisites : Knowledge about basic Client Server applications.
MODULE 1 – CLIENT / SERVER CONCEPTS (9L+3P)
Client server – File server – Database server – Group server – Object server – Web server –
Middleware – General middleware – Service specific middleware – Client / server building blocks –
RPC – Messaging – Peer‐to‐peer.
1. Create a distributed name server (like DNS) RMI.
Suggested reading:
https://www.whoishostingthis.com/resources/corba/
MODULE 2 – EJB ARCHITECTURE (9L+3P)
EJB architecture – Overview of EJB software architecture – View of EJB – Conversation – Building and
deploying EJB – Roles in EJB.
1. Create a Java Bean to draw various graphical shapes and display it using or without using
BDK.
Suggested reading:
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/ejb/
MODULE 3 -EJB APPLICATIONS (9L+3P)
EJB session beans – EJB entity beans – EJB clients – EJB deployment – Building an application with EJB.
1. Develop an Enterprise Java Bean for student Information System.
2. Develop an Enterprise Java Bean for Library operations
Suggested reading:
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/ejb/
MODULE 4 – CORBA (9L+3P)
CORBA – Distributed systems – Purpose – Exploring CORBA alternatives – Architecture overview –
CORBA and networking model – CORBA object model – IDL – ORB – Building an application with
CORBA.
151
1. Develop a middleware component for retrieving Stock Market Exchange information using CORBA.
2. Develop a middleware component for retrieving Bank Balance using CORBA.
Suggested reading:
http://www.ois.com/Products/what‐is‐corba.html
MODULE 5 – COM (9L+3P)
COM – Data types – Interfaces – Proxy and stub – Marshalling – Implementing server/ client –
Interface pointers – Object creation – Invocation – Destruction – Comparison COM and CORBA –
Introduction to .NET – Overview of .NET architecture – Marshalling – Remoting.
1.Develop a component for browsing CD catalogue using COM / .NET
2.Develop a component for retrieving information from message box using DCOM/.NET
Suggested reading:
https://www.codeguru.com/cpp/com‐tech/activex/tutorials/article.php/c5567/Step‐by‐Step‐
COM‐Tutorial.htm
TEXT BOOKS
1 Robert Orfali, Dan Harkey and Jeri Edwards, “The Essential Client / Server Survival Guide”,
Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd,Third Edition, 2002.
2 Tom Valesky, ”Enterprise Java Beans”, Pearson Education, 2002.
3 Jason Pritchard, “COM and CORBA Side by Side”, Addison Wesley, 2000
4 Joel Murach,Anne Boehm “ C#”, Murach,2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Mowbray, “Inside CORBA”, Pearson Education, 2002
2 Jeremy Rosenberger, “Teach Yourself CORBA in 14 days”, TEC Media, 2000.
MOOC
152
LIST OF DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES – SEMESTER V
COURSE TITLE DATABASE SECURITY CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Identify the security issues and solve them using appropriate security models. 1,2,3
Implement security mechanisms in a database system and provide a secured 1,2,3
2
information flow.
3 Design secured software using the methodological approach. 1,2,3
Write Shell Programming for various functionalities required for the 1,2,3
4 applications
Identify and discover security attacks through statistical inference and 1,2,3,4
5 discovery methods.
6 Develop new generation DBMS through protection models. 1,2,3,11,12

Introduction to Databases Security Problems in Databases Security Controls Conclusions Security
Models ‐1: Introduction Access Matrix Model Take‐Grant Model Acten Model PN Model Hartson and
Hsiao's Model Fernandez's Model Bussolati and Martella's Model for Distributed databases.
MODULE 2: SECURITY MODELS AND MECHANISMS (9)
Bell and LaPadula's Model Biba's Model Dion's Model Sea View Model Jajodia and Sandhu's Model
The Lattice Model for the Flow Control conclusion. Security Mechanisms: Introduction User
Identification/Authentication Memory Protection Resource Protection Control Flow Mechanisms
Isolation Security Functionalities in Some Operating Systems Trusted Computer System Evaluation
Criteria.
MODULE 3: SECURITY SOFTWARE DESIGN (9)
Introduction A Methodological Approach to Security Software Design Secure Operating System
Design Secure DBMS Design Security Packages Database Security Design.
MODULE 4: STATISTICAL DATABASE PROTECTION & INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS (9)
Introduction Statistics Concepts and Definitions Types of Attacks Inference Controls evaluation
Criteria for Control Comparison .Introduction IDES System RETISS System ASES System Discovery.
MODULE 5: MODELS FOR THE PROTECTION OF NEW GENERATION DATABASE SYSTEMS (9)
Introduction A Model for the Protection of Frame Based Systems A Model for the Protection of
Object‐Oriented Systems SORION Model for the Protection of Object‐Oriented Databases A Model for
153
the Protection of New Generation Database Systems: the Orion Model Jajodia and Kogan's Model A
Model for the Protection of Active Databases Conclusions.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Database Security and Auditing, Hassan A. Afyouni, India Edition, Cengage Delmar Learning India,
2009.
2 Database Security, Silvana Castano, MariagraziaFugini, Giancarlo Martella, PierangelaSamarati,
Second edition, ACM Press, Pearson Education,1995
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Database Security, Alfred Basta, melissazgola, CENGAGE learning,2011.
COURSE TITLE MULTI CORE ARCHITECTURE CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Recognize the need for parallel computing 1,2
2 Write and run simple parallel programs 2,3,4
3 Implement distributed memory programs in MPI 3,4,5
4 Implement shared memory programs using Pthreads 3,4,5
5 Implement shared memory programs in OpenMP 3,4,5
6 Evaluate the parallel programs 3,4,12
MODULE 1 – PARALLEL HARDWARE AND PARALLEL SOFTWARE (9)
Need for Parallel Computing- Background and Modifications of von Neumann Model ‐ Parallel
Hardware‐ Parallel Software‐ Input and Output‐ Performance ‐ Parallel Program Design ‐ Writing and
Running Parallel Programs.
MODULE 2 – DISTRIBUTED-MEMORY PROGRAMMING WITH MPI (9)

Introduction‐The Trapezoidal Rule in MPI ‐ Dealing with I/O ‐ Collective Communication‐ MPI Derived
Datatypes‐ Performance Evaluation of MPI Programs
154
MODULE 3 --SHARED-MEMORY PROGRAMMING WITH PTHREADS (9)

Processes, Threads, and Pthreads ‐ Hello, World ‐ Matrix‐Vector Multiplication ‐ Critical Sections ‐
Busy‐Waiting – Mutexes ‐ Producer‐Consumer Synchronization and Semaphores ‐ Barriers and
Condition Variables ‐ Read‐Write Locks‐ Caches, Cache Coherence, and False Sharing – Thread Safety.
MODULE 4 – SHARED MEMORY PROGRAMMING WITH OpenMP (9)

Introduction ‐The Trapezoidal Rule ‐ Scope of Variables ‐ The Reduction Clause ‐ The parallel
forDirective ‐ More About Loops in OpenMP: Sorting ‐ Scheduling Loops ‐ Producers and Consumers‐
Caches, Cache Coherence, and False Sharing – Thread Safety.
MODULE 5 – PARALLEL PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT (9)
Two n‐Body Solvers‐ Parallelizing and Evaluation in OpenMP‐ Tree search – Recursive and Non‐
Recursive DFS –Data structures and Performance of the serial implementations‐ static and dynamic
parallelization of tree search using Pthreads and evaluation ‐ Parallelizing the tree‐search programs
using OpenMP and its performance ‐ Implementation of tree search using MPI with static and dynamic
partitioning.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Peter S. Pacheco, “An Introduction to Parallel Programming”, Morgan Kauffman/Elsevier, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Michael J Quinn, “Parallel programming in C with MPI and OpenMP”,Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
2 Shameem Akhter and Jason Roberts, “Multi‐core Programming”, Intel Press, 2006.
3 Darryl Gove, “Multicore Application Programming for Windows, Linux, and Oracle Solaris”,
Pearson, 2011.
E BOOKS
1 https://www.goodreads.com/book/show/9230165‐an‐introduction‐to‐parallel‐programming
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/parprog1
2 https://www.udemy.com/introduction‐to‐parallel‐programming‐using‐gpgpu‐and‐cuda/
155
COURSE TITLE SOFT COMPUTING CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Apply concepts of fuzzy sets, fuzzy logic and heuristics based systems. 1,2,3
2 Derive appropriate rules for fuzzy inference systems. 1,2,3
3 Apply the mathematical background to optimize neural network learning 1,2,3
4 Implement optimization algorithms and random search procedures in self‐
2,3
learning.
5 Analyze case studies to illustrate the intelligent behavior of programs based on
3,4,12
soft computing
Prerequisites : Set Theory, Fuzzy Set Theory
MODULE 1 – FUZZY SET THEORY (9)
Introduction to Neuro – Fuzzy and Soft Computing – Fuzzy Sets – Basic Definition and Terminology –
Set‐theoretic Operations – Member Function Formulation and parameterization – Fuzzy Rules and
Fuzzy Reasoning – Extension Principle and Fuzzy Relations – Fuzzy If‐Then Rules – Fuzzy Reasoning –
Fuzzy Inference Systems – Mamdani Fuzzy Models – Sugeno Fuzzy Models – Tsukamoto Fuzzy Models
– Input Space Partitioning and Fuzzy Modeling.
Suggested reading :https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs13/unit?unit=5&lesson=33
http://www.vssut.ac.in/lecture_notes/lecture1423723637.pdf
MODULE 2 – OPTIMIZATION (9)
Derivative‐based Optimization – Descent Methods – The Method of Steepest Descent – Classical
Newton’s Method – Step Size Determination – Derivative‐free Optimization – Genetic Algorithms –
Simulated Annealing – Random Search – Downhill Simplex Search‐ Particle Swarm Techniques ‐ Ant
Colony Optimization.
Suggested reading: https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs13/unit?unit=7&lesson=47
MODULE 3 – NEURAL NETWORKS (9)
Supervised Learning Neural Networks – Perceptrons ‐ Adaline – Backpropagation
MutilayerPerceptrons – Radial Basis Function Networks – Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks –
Competitive Learning Networks – Kohonen Self‐Organizing Networks – Learning Vector Quantization
– Hebbian Learning.
Suggested reading :https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs13/unit?unit=13&lesson=80
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/110106064/17.
156
MODULE 4 – NEURO FUZZY MODELING (9)

Adaptive Neuro‐Fuzzy Inference Systems – Architecture – Hybrid Learning Algorithm – Learning
Methods that Cross‐fertilize ANFIS and RBFN – Coactive Neuro Fuzzy Modeling – Framework Neuron
Functions for Adaptive Networks – Neuro Fuzzy Spectrum.
Suggested reading :http://www.vssut.ac.in/lecture_notes/lecture1423723637.pdf
MODULE 5 – APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGECE (9)
Printed Character Recognition – Inverse Kinematics Problems – Automobile Fuel Efficiency Prediction
– Soft Computing for Color Recipe Prediction.
Suggested reading :
TEXT BOOKS
1 J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani, “Neuro‐Fuzzy and Soft Computing”, Pearson, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Timothy J.Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw‐Hill, 1997..
2 Davis E.Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Addison
Wesley, 2009
3 S. Rajasekaran and G.A.V.Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms”, PHI, 2003.
E BOOKS
https://lillipdf56‐por.firebaseapp.com/14‐ricky‐hoeger‐6/9789332549883‐neuro‐fuzzy‐and‐
1
soft‐computing‐a‐computational‐a‐ebook.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/neural‐networks
2 https://https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs13/
157
COURSE TITLE DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Infer the basics and fundamentals of digital image processing, such as 1,2, 3, 4
digitization, sampling, quantization, and 2D‐transforms.
2 Apply the techniques of smoothing, sharpening and enhancement on the image 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
and extend to the restoration concepts and filtering techniques.
3 Illustrate the concepts of segmentation and examine the multi resolution 1,2,3,4, 5
analysis.
4 Interpret and illustrate the basics of Image Compression. 1, 2
5 Analyze the various recognition methods. 1,2,3,4,5
6 Build the real‐world problem by designing an appropriate system and 1,2, 3, 4, 5,
implementing the theory and algorithms of this course. 11,12
Prerequisites : Concepts of Digital Signal Processing
MODULE1 – DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS (9)
Introduction – Steps in Image Processing Systems – Image Acquisition – Sampling and
Quantization – Pixel Relationships – Color Fundamentals and Models, File Formats, Image operations
– Arithmetic, Geometric and Morphological, Two‐dimensional mathematical preliminaries, 2D
transforms‐DFT, DCT.
MODULE 2 –IMAGE ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION (9)
Spatial Domain Gray level Transformations Histogram Processing Spatial Filtering – Smoothing and
Sharpening‐ Frequency Domain: Filtering in Frequency Domain – DFT, FFT, DCT – Smoothing and
Sharpening filters – Homomorphic Filtering.
Image Restoration – degradation model, Properties, Noise models – Mean Filters – Order Statistics –
Adaptive filters – Band reject Filters – Band pass Filters – Notch Filters – Optimum Notch Filtering –
Inverse Filtering – Wiener filtering
MODULE 3 – IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS (9)
Detection of Discontinuities – Edge Operators – Edge Linking and Boundary Detection –
Thresholding – Region Based Segmentation – Morphological WaterSheds – Motion
Segmentation, Feature Analysis and Extraction.
Multi Resolution Analysis : Image Pyramids – Multi resolution expansion – Wavelet Transforms.
MODULE 4 – IMAGE COMPRESSION AND RECOGNITION (9)
Image Compression : Fundamentals – Models – Elements of Information Theory – Error Free
Compression – Lossy Compression – Compression Standards.
158
Image Recognition: Boundary representation, Boundary description, Fourier Descriptor, Regional

Descriptors – Topological feature, Texture – Patterns and Pattern classes – Recognition based on
matching.
MODULE 5 - APPLICATIONS OF IMAGE PROCESSING (9)
Image Classification – Image Recognition – Image Understanding – Video Motion Analysis – Image
Fusion – Steganography – Digital Compositing – Mosaics – Colour Image Processing
TEXT BOOKS
1 Rafael C Gonzalez, Richard E Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven Eddins, Digital Image Processing using MATLAB
Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
2 Kenneth R. Castleman,Digital Image Processing Pearson, 2006.
3 Anil K.Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Person Educaiton, 2003.
4 William K Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Willey, New York, 2002.
5 Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac and Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis and Machine
Vision”, Second Edition, Thomson Learning, 2001.
E BOOKS
http://web.ipac.caltech.edu/staff/fmasci/home/astro refs/Digital Image Processing 3rdEd
1
truncated.pdf
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ee40/
159
COURSE TITLE SOFTWARE AND APPLICATION SECURITY CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Apply the knowledge of the fundamental concepts of security and develop the 1,2,3,4
threat models.
2 Analyze and Design the Client and Server Programming Model using Network 1,2,3,4,5
Security concepts.
3 Apply and Illustrate the concepts of Web Application Security such as SQL 1,2,3,4,5
Injection, XSS.
4 Analyze and Design the coding in security using C Programming Language. 1,2,3,4,5
5 Analyze and Design the coding in security using C++ and JAVA Programming 1,2,3,4,5
Languages.
6 Build the Secure Code using C, C++, Java and Web Programming Languages and 1,2,3,4,
apply the concepts of Cryptography and Network Security. 5,11, 12
Prerequisites : Computer Networks, Web Technology, C, C++, Java
MODULE 1 – SECURITY FUNDAMENTALS (8)
Security Attacks ‐ Security Services ‐ Security Mechanisms ‐ Need for secure systems‐ Proactive
security development process‐ Security principles ‐ threat modeling.
MODULE 2 – NETWORK SECURITY PROGRAMMING (9)
Raw Socket basics ‐Socket Libraries and Functionality ‐ Programming Servers and Clients ‐
Programming Wired and Wireless Sniffers ‐ Programming arbitrary packet injectors ‐ PCAP file parsing
and analysis.
MODULE 3 – WEB APPLICATION SECURITY (10)
Web Servers and Client scripting ‐ Web Application Fuzzers ‐ Scraping Web Applications – HTML and
XML file analysis ‐ Web Browser Emulation ‐ Attacking Web Services ‐ Application Proxies and Data
Mangling ‐ Automation of attacks such as SQL Injection, XSS.
MODULE 4 – SECURITY CODING IN C (9)

Character strings‐ String manipulation errors – String Vulnerabilities and exploits – Mitigation
strategies for strings‐ Pointers – Mitigation strategies in pointer based vulnerabilities – Buffer
Overflow based vulnerabilities.
MODULE 5 – SECURITY CODING IN C++ AND JAVA (9)

Dynamic memory management‐ Common errors in dynamic memory management‐ Memory
managers‐ Double –free vulnerabilities –Integer security‐ Mitigation strategies
160
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 William Stallings, “cryptography And Network Security”, 7Th Edition, Pearson, 2016.
2 Bryan Sullivan and Vincent Liu, “Web Application Security, A Beginner's Guide”, McGraw‐Hill
Education; 1 edition , 2011.
3 Michael Howard , David LeBlanc, “Writing Secure Code”, Microsoft Press, 2nd Ed., 2003
4 Robert C.Seacord, “Secure Coding in C and C++”, Pearson Education, 2nd Ed., 2013
COURSE TITLE DISTRIBUTED DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Explain concepts of Distributed DBMS 1,2
2 design Strategies & Fragmentations concepts 3,4
3 integrate the Distributed DB 3,4,5
4 Execute of Query processing & Optimizations 3,4
5 Recall the concept of deadlock handling in distributed systems 2,3
6 Implement Transaction processing & Database Security 3,4,12
Prerequisites : Distributed Database Management Systems
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION DDBMS (9)
DDBMS – DBMS Concepts: Database and Database Management System‐Database Schemas‐Types
of DBMS‐Operations on DBMS. DDBMS – Distributed Databases: Distributed Database Management
System‐ Factors Encouraging DDBMS ‐ Advantages of Distributed Databases ‐ Design Alternatives.
Suggested reading : http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/ln/ddb01.pdf
http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/index.html
MODULE 2 – DISTRIBUTED DATABASE DESIGN (9)

Distributed Database Design: Types of Distributed Databases ‐ Distributed DBMS Architectures ‐
Architectural Models. DDBMS – Design Strategies: Data Replication – Fragmentation – Vertical
Fragmentation ‐ Horizontal Fragmentation ‐ Hybrid Fragmentation ‐ Distribution Transparency:
Location Transparency ‐ Fragmentation Transparency ‐ Replication Transparency ‐ Combination of
Transparencies.
Suggested reading : http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/index.html
161
MODULE 3 – DISTRIBUTED DATABASE INTEGRATION (9)

Database Integration‐ Bottom‐Up Design Methodology‐ Schema Matching‐ Schema Heterogeneity‐
Linguistic Matching Approaches‐ Constraint‐based Matching Approaches‐ Learning‐based Matching‐
Combined Matching Approaches‐ Schema Integration‐ Schema Mapping‐ Mapping Creation‐
Mapping Maintenance and Data Cleaning.
Suggested reading :http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/ln/ddb03.pdf
MODULE 4 – DISTRIBUTED QUERY PROCESSING (9)

DDBMS – Relational Algebra for Query Optimization: Query Processing ‐ Relational Algebra ‐
Translating SQL Queries into Relational Algebra ‐ Computation of Relational Algebra Operators ‐
Computation of Joins. DDBMS – Query Optimization in Centralized Systems: Query Parsing and
Translation ‐ Approaches to Query Optimization. DDBMS – Query Optimization in Distributed Systems:
Distributed Query Processing Architecture ‐ Mapping Global Queries into Local Queries ‐ Distributed
Query Optimization.
MODULE 5 – CONCURRENCY CONTROL (9)

DDBMS – Transaction Processing Systems: Transactions – Transaction Operations – Transaction
States – Schedules and Conflicts – Serializability. DDBMS – Controlling Concurrency: Locking Based
Concurrency Control Protocols – Timestamp Concurrency Control Algorithms – Optimistic
Concurrency Control Algorithm. DDBMS – Deadlock Handling: What are Deadlocks? – Deadlock
Handling in Centralized Systems – Deadlock Handling in Distributed Systems.
DDBMS – Database Security & Cryptography: Database Security and Threats – Public Key
Cryptography – Digital Signatures – Data Security – Data Auditing.
Suggested reading :http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/ln/ddb08.pdf
http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/ln/ddb09.pdf
TEXT BOOKS
1 M.Tamer Ozsu, Patrick Valdriuz “Principles of Distributed Database Systems”, 3rd Ed. Springer,
2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Stefano Ceri, Giuseppe Pelagatti, Distributed Databases: Principles and Systems, McGraw Hill,
2007.
2 Chhanda Ray, Ray, Distributed Database Systems, Pearson Education India, 2009.
3 David Arthur Bell, Jane Grimson, Distributed Database Systems, Addison‐Wesley, 1992.
162
E BOOKS
1 https://www.tutorialspoint.com/web_developers_guide/web_pdf_version.htm
2 http://www.scs.ryerson.ca/~mcarberr/cps610/DDBMS.pdf
3 http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/index.html
MOOC
1 http://www.inf.unibz.it/dis/teaching/DDB07/index.html
2 http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2280/Database‐Design/15
163
LIST OF DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES – SEMESTER VII
COURSE TITLE SOFTWARE TESTNG CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Design test cases suitable for a software development for different domains 2
2. Identify suitable tests to be carried out. 2,3
3. Prepare test planning based on the document. 2,3
4. Document test plans and test cases designed 3
5 Use the automated testing tools to check the behavior of the real time
3,4,5
application
Prerequisites :Software Engineering, Basic Programming
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO TESTING (9)
Testing as an Engineering Activity – Testing as a Process – Testing axioms – Basic definitions –
Software Testing Principles – The Tester’s Role in a Software Development Organization – Origins of
Defects – Cost of defects – Defect Classes – The Defect Repository and Test Design – Defect Examples
– Developer/Tester Support of Developing a Defect Repository – Defect Prevention strategies
Suggested Activity: Identify a Defect in any real time application and prepare a Defect identification
report
MODULE 2 – TEST CASE DESIGN (9)
Test case Design Strategies – Using Black Bod Approach to Test Case Design – Random Testing –
Requirements based testing – Boundary Value Analysis – Equivalence Class Partitioning – Statebased
testing – Cause‐effect graphing – Compatibility testing – user documentation testing – domain testing
– Using White Box Approach to Test design – Test Adequacy Criteria – static testing vs. structural
testing – code functional testing – Coverage and Control Flow Graphs – Covering Code Logic – Paths
– code complexity testing – Evaluating Test Adequacy Criteria.
Suggested Activity: Test Plan Preparation of window based and web based application.
MODULE 3 – LEVELS OF TESTING (9)

The need for Levers of Testing – Unit Test – Unit Test Planning – Designing the Unit Tests – The Test
Harness – Running the Unit tests and Recording results – Integration tests – Designing Integration
Tests – Integration Test Planning – Scenario testing – Defect bash elimination System Testing –
Acceptance testing – Performance testing – Regression Testing – Internationalization testing – Ad‐hoc
testing – Alpha, Beta Tests – Testing OO systems – Usability and Accessibility testing – Configuration
testing – Compatibility testing – Testing the documentation – Website testing.
Suggested Activity: Test case design of any application.
164
MODULE 4 – TEST DATA MANAGEMENT (9)

People and organizational issues in testing – Organization structures for testing teams – testing
services – Test Planning – Test Plan Components – Test Plan Attachments – Locating Test Items – test
management – test process – Reporting Test Results – The role of three groups in Test Planning and
Policy Development – Introducing the test specialist – Skills needed by a test specialist – Building a
Testing Group.
Suggested Activity: Testing with Test Director Tool.
MODULE 5 – AUTOMATION TESTING (9)
Software test automation – skill needed for automation – scope of automation – design and
architecture for automation – requirements for a test tool – challenges in automation – Test metrics
and measurements – project, progress and productivity metrics.
Suggested Activity: Regression Testing and Scripting with Silk Test.
TEXT BOOKS
1 M.G.Limaye , Software Testing, Tata McGraw‐Hill, 2014.
2 Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Software Testing – Principles and Practices”,
3 Ron Patton, “Software Testing”, Second Edition, Sams Publishing, Pearson Education, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Edward Kit,” Software Testing in the Real World – Improving the Process”, Pearson Education,
1995
2 Boris Beizer,” Software Testing Techniques” – 2nd Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York,
1990.
3 Ilene Burnstein, “Practical Software Testing”, Springer International Edition, 2003
4 Aditya P. Mathur, “Foundations of Software Testing _ Fundamental Algorithms and Techniques”,
Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education, 2008
5 Implementing Automated Software Testing: How to Save Time and Lower Costs While Raising
Quality ‐ By: Elfriede Dustin.
E BOOKS
http://www.softwaretestingclass.com/wp‐content/uploads/2016/02/Beginner‐Guide‐To‐
1
Software‐Testing.pdf
http://www.diku.dk/forskning/performance‐engineering/Software‐
2
construction/Slides/testing.pdf
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs32
2 https://www.edx.org/micromasters/software‐testing‐verification
3 https://www.tutorialspoint.com/software_testing/index.html
4 https://www.udemy.com/introduction‐to‐software‐testing‐or‐software‐qa/
165
COURSE TITLE CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS CREDITS 4

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 State the basic concepts of cyber physical system in real world application. 1, 2
2 State the basic principles of automated control design. 1, 2
3 Paraphrase the security practices in cyber physical system. 1, 2
4 Implement own model for cyber physical system. 3
5 Paraphrase formal methods for safety assurance of cyber physical system. 1, 2
6 Demonstrate the secure deployment of cyber physical system. 3,5
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS (9)
Cyber‐Physical Systems (CPS) in the real world ‐ Basic principles of design and validation of CPS ‐
Industry 4.0, AutoSAR, IIOT implications ‐ Building Automation, Medical CPS ‐‐ CPS ‐ Platform
components ‐ CPS HW platforms ‐ Processors, Sensors, Actuators ‐ CPS Network – Wireless Hart,
CAN, Automotive Ethernet ‐ CPS Sw stack ‐ RTOS ‐ Scheduling Real Time control tasks.
MODULE 2 – PRINCIPLES OF AUTOMATED CONTROL DESIGN (9)

Principles of Automated Control Design ‐ Dynamical Systems and Stability ‐ Controller Design
Techniques ‐ Stability Analysis: CLFs, MLFs, stability under slow switching ‐ Performance under Packet
drop and Noise.
MODULE 3 – CPS IMPLEMENTATION (9)
CPS implementation ‐ From features to software components, Mapping software components to
ECUs ‐ CPS Performance Analysis ‐ effect of scheduling, bus latency, sense and actuation faults on
control performance, network congestion.
MODULE 4 – FORMAL METHODS FOR SAFETY ASSURANCE OF CPS (9)
Formal Methods for Safety Assurance of Cyber‐Physical Systems ‐ Advanced Automata based
modeling and analysis ‐ Basic introduction and examples ‐ Timed and Hybrid Automata ‐ Definition of
trajectories, zenoness ‐ Formal Analysis: Flow pipe construction, reachability analysis ‐ Analysis of CPS
Software: ‐ Weakest Pre‐conditions ‐ Bounded Model checking.
MODULE 5 – SECURE DEPLOYMENT OF CPS (9)
Secure Deployment of CPS ‐ Attack models ‐ Secure Task mapping and Partitioning ‐ State estimation
for attack detection ‐ Automotive Case study : Vehicle ABS hacking ‐ Power Distribution Case study :
Attacks on SmartGrids.
166
TEXT BOOKS
1 Rajeev Alur, “Principles of Cyber‐Physical Systems” ,The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts
London, England, 2015
2 Edward Ashford Lee, Sanjit Arunkumar Seshia “ Introduction to Embedded Systems: A Cyber‐
physical Systems Approach”, LeeSeshia.org,2011
3 Andre Platzer, “Logical Foundations of Cyber‐Physical Systems”, Springer 2018
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Edward Kit,” Software Testing in the Real World – Improving the Process”, Pearson Education,
1995
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/cyber‐physical‐systems
COURSE TITLE SCRIPTING LANGUAGES CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Apply the Perl coding in web pages. 3,4,12
2 Make use of advanced concepts of Perl in scripting language. 3,4,12
3 Apply the advanced PHP code in web pages. 3,4,12
4 Apply the JavaScript coding in web pages. 3,4,12
5 Develop the web pages using Python 3,4,12
6 Compare and contrast the differences between different scripting languages. 2,3,4,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1– INTRODUCTION TO PEARL SCRIPTING (9)
Scripts and Programs, Origin of Scripting , Scripting Today, Characteristics of Scripting Languages, Uses
for Scripting Languages, Web Scripting, and the universe of Scripting Languages. PERL‐ Names and
Values, Variables, Scalar Expressions, Control Structures, arrays, list, hashes, strings, pattern and
regular expressions, subroutines.
MODULE 2 – ADVANCED PERL (9)
Finer points of looping, pack and unpack, file system, eval, data structures, packages, modules,
objects, interfacing to the operating system, Creating Internet ware applications, Dirty Hands Internet
Programming, security Issues. PHP Basics PHP Basics‐ Features, Embedding PHP Code in your Web
167
pages, Outputting the data to the browser, Data types, Variables, Constants, expressions, string
interpolation, control structures, Function, Creating a Function, Function Libraries, Arrays, strings and
Regular Expressions.
MODULE 3– ADVANCED PHP PROGRAMMING (9)
PHP and Web Forms, Files, PHP Authentication and Methodologies ‐Hard Coded, File Based, Database
Based, IP Based, Login Administration, Uploading Files with PHP, Sending Email using PHP, PHP
Encryption Functions, the Mcrypt package, Building Web sites for the World.
MODULE 4 – JAVASCRIPT (9)
Introduction to Java Script‐ Uses of Java Script‐ Programming Basics‐ Events‐Objects‐Examples using
Javascript ‐ jQuery : Selectors, DOM Manipulation with jQuery – Other Javascript Frameworks.
MODULE 5- PYTHON (9)
Introduction to Python language, python‐syntax, statements, functions, Built‐in‐functions and
Methods, Modules in python, Exception Handling. Integrated Web Applications in Python – Building
Small, Efficient Python Web Systems, Web Application Framework.
TEXT BOOKS
1 The World of Scripting Languages, David Barron, Wiley Publications,2009.
2 Python Web Programming, Steve Holden and David Beazley, New Riders Publications.
3 Beginning PHP and MySQL, 3rd Edition, Jason Gilmore, Apress Publications (Dream tech.)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 SAMs teach yourself HTML, CSS &Javascript
E BOOKS
1 https://www.abebooks.com/World‐Scripting‐Languages‐David‐Barron‐Wiley/4436824500/bd
MOOC
168
COURSE TITLE PARALLEL PROGRAMMING CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Explain the language design issues related to parallel programming 1,2
2 Apply the best practices while designing algorithms for parallel programming 2,3,4
3 Demonstrate the working of Tuple Space and Matrix Multiplication 2,3
4 Implement the parallel programming using C++, FORTRAN,HPF. 2,3,4
5 Explain working of high performance workstation and shared memory parallel
1,2
processing
6 Analyze the performance of the algorithm designed for Parallel processing 3,4,12
Prerequisites :Design Of Parallel Algorithms
MODULE1–INTRODUCTION TO PERL AND SCRIPTING (9)
Parallel Computers and Computation ‐ A Parallel Machine Model ‐ A Parallel Programming Model ‐
Parallel Algorithm Examples‐ Partitioning – Communication – Agglomeration – Mapping ‐ Load‐
Balancing Algorithms‐ Task‐Scheduling Algorithms ‐ Case Studies‐ Random Numbers Generation ‐
Hypercube Algorithms ‐Vector Reduction‐ Matrix Transposition‐ Mergesort.
MODULE 2 – APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE MODELING (9)
A Quantitative Basis for Design ‐ Defining Performance‐ Approaches to Performance Modeling‐
Developing Models‐ Performance parameters‐ time, scalability, overheads, bandwidth, efficiency,
speed, ‐ interconnection networks‐ Input/output‐ Case Study: Shortest‐Path Algorithms‐Floyd's
Algorithm‐Dijkstra's Algorithm ‐Modular Design Review‐Modularity and Parallel Computing‐
Performance Analysis ‐ Case Study: Convolution, Tuple Space and Matrix Multiplication
MODULE 3 – PARALLEL COMPUTING DEVELOPMENT TOOLS -I (9)
C++ Review‐ CC++ Introduction‐ Concurrency‐ Locality‐ Processor Objects‐ Global Pointers‐ Thread
Placement‐ Communication‐ Remote Operations‐ Synchronization‐ Mutual Exclusion‐ Data Transfer
Functions‐ Asynchronous Communication‐ Determinism‐ Mapping‐ Modularity‐Performance Issues
MODULE 4 – PARALLEL COMPUTING DEVELOPMENT TOOLS -II (9)
Fortran M ‐ Concurrency‐ Communication‐ Unstructured Communication‐ Asynchronous
Communication‐ Determinism‐ Argument Passing‐ Mapping‐ Modularity ‐ High Performance Fortran
‐Data Parallelism‐ Concurrency‐Data Distribution‐Dummy Arguments and Modularity‐Other HPF
Features‐Performance Issues
MODULE 5 – ADD-ON TOOLS FOR DEVELOPMENT (9)
Message Passing Libraries ‐The MPI Programming Model‐MPI Basics ‐ C & Fortran Language bindings
with MPI functions‐ Global Operations‐Asynchronous Communication‐ Modularity‐Other MPI
Features‐Performance Issues‐Performance Tools ‐ Performance Analysis‐ Data Collection‐Data
169
Transformation and Visualization‐Tools –Paragraph‐ Upshot—Pablo‐Gauge‐ParAide‐ IBM's Parallel

Environment‐AIMS‐ Custom Tools.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Ion Foster, Designing and Building Parallel Programs, Addison Wesley, 2003
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Arjen Markus, Modern Fortran in Practice, Cambridge University Press, 2012
2 Online :http://ebooks.cambridge.org/ebook.jsf?bid=CBO9781139084796
3 Charles H. Koelbe, High Performance Fortran Handbook, MIT Press 1993
4 Michael J. Quinn, “Parallel Programming in C with MPI and OpenMP”, Tata McGraw‐Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., 2003.
5 B. Wilkinson and M. Allen, “Parallel Programming – Techniques & applications using networked
workstations and parallel computers”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
E BOOKS
1 https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/09ed/7308fdfb0b640077328aa4fd10ce429f511a.pdf
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs39/course
2 https://www.coursera.org/learn/parprog1
COURSE TITLE CYBER FORENSICS AND LAWS CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 State the basic concepts of Cyber Crime. 1,2
2 Paraphrase the issues in Cyber security 1,2,6,8
3 Demonstrate and Interpret working with Investigation Tools 3,4,5
4 Implement Cyber Investigation. 2,3,4
5 Demonstrate the Digital Forensics. 3,4,5
6 Explain the Cyber laws and Practices 1,6
Prerequisites :Cyber Security
MODULE 1 - INTRODUCTION (9)
Introduction and Overview of Cyber Crime ‐ Nature and Scope of Cyber Crime ‐ Types of Cyber Crime:
Social Engineering ‐ Categories of Cyber Crime ‐ Property Cyber Crime.
Suggested reading :https://study.com/courses_in_cybercrime_studies.html
170
MODULE 2 – CYBER CRIME ISSUES (9)

Unauthorized Access to Computers ‐ Computer Intrusions ‐ White collar Crimes ‐ Viruses and
Malicious Code ‐ Internet Hacking and Cracking ‐ Virus Attacks – Software Piracy ‐ Intellectual
Property ‐ Mail Bombs ‐ Exploitation ‐ Stalking and Obscenity in Internet ‐ Digital laws and legislation
‐ Law Enforcement Roles and Responses.
Suggested reading : https://www.coursera.org/learn/cyber-conflicts/lecture/xndSq/introduction-
to-cybercrime-and-fundamental-issues
MODULE 3 – INVESTIGATION (9)
Introduction to Cyber Crime Investigation ‐ Investigation Tools – Discovery ‐ Digital Evidence
Collection‐ Evidence Preservation ‐ E‐Mail Investigation – Tracking ‐ IP Tracking ‐ E‐Mail Recovery ‐
Hands on Case Studies ‐ Encryption and Decryption Methods ‐ Search and Seizure of Computers ‐
Recovering Deleted Evidences ‐ Password Cracking.
Suggested reading : https://www.bu.edu /programs /cybercrime-investigation-cybersecurity/
MODULE 4 – DIGITAL FORENSICS (9)
Introduction to Digital Forensics ‐ Forensic Software and Hardware ‐ Analysis and Advanced Tools ‐
Forensic Technology and Practices ‐ Forensic Ballistics and Photography ‐ Face, Iris and Fingerprint
Recognition ‐ Audio Video Analysis ‐ Windows System Forensics ‐ Linux System Forensics ‐ Network
Forensics.
Suggested reading : http://www.open.edu/openlearn/science-maths.../digital-forensics/content-
section-0
MODULE 5 – LAWS AND ACTS (9)
Laws and Ethics ‐ Digital Evidence Controls ‐ Evidence Handling Procedures ‐ Basics of Indian Evidence
ACT IPC and CrPC ‐ Electronic Communication Privacy ACT ‐ Legal Policies.
Suggested reading : https://www.sifs.in/online-course-cyber-law.php
TEXT BOOKS
1 Bill Nelson, Amelia Phillips, Christopher Steuart, “Guide to Computer Forensics and
Investigations: Processing Digital Evidence”, Cengage Learning India Private Limited, Fifth Edition
2016.
2 Kevin Mandia, Chris Prosise, Matt Pepe, “Incident Response and Computer Forensics”, Tata
Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Robert M Slade, “Software Forensics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
2 Bernadette H Schell, Clemens Martin, “Cybercrime ‐ A Reference Handbook”, ABC ‐ CLIO Inc,
California, 2004.
3 “Understanding Forensics in IT”, NIIT (Corporation) Publication, Prentice‐Hall of India Pvt.
Limited 2005.
E BOOKS
1 https://eforensicsmag.com/download/introduction‐to‐digital‐forensics/
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/computer‐forensics‐ritx‐cyber502x‐0
2 https://www.udemy.com/digital‐forensics‐for‐cyber‐professionals/
3 https://www.cybrary.it/course/computer‐hacking‐forensics‐analyst/
171
COURSE TITLE SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Explain about principles of service orientation 1,2
2 Demonstrate software oriented architectures and service composition 1,2
3 Describe the model of SOA management 1,2
4 Implement service oriented applications 2,3,4,12
5 Develop and deploy web services using different design tools 2,3,5,12
6 Outline the need for web service security 1,2,3
Prerequisites :
MODULE 1 – SOA AND WEB SERVICES FUNDAMENTALS (9)
Fundamentals of SOA ‐ Characteristics ‐ Common misperception ‐ Benefits ‐ Pitfalls of adopting SOA ‐
Transition from XML to web service to SOA ‐ Standards for SOA ‐ The roots of SOA‐ Web services
frame work – Service descriptions with WSDL ‐ Messaging with SOAP
Suggested reading : nptel.ac.in/courses/110105083/36
MODULE 2 – SECOND GENERATION WEB SERVICES (9)
Activity management and comparison ‐ Message exchange patterns – Service activity ‐ Coordination ‐
Atomic transactions ‐ Business activities – Business protocols ‐ Process definitions ‐ Process services ‐
Orchestration and coordination ‐ Collaboration. Addressing ‐ Reliable messaging ‐ WS policy framework
‐ Policy assertions and alleviates policies relationship to activity management ‐ Metadata exchange
security ‐ WS notification and eventing.
MODULE 3 – SERVICE ORIENTATION (9)
Service oriented architecture ‐ Components ‐ Common principles of service ‐ Orientation ‐
Interrelationship among principles ‐ Service orientation versus object orientation ‐ Service layers ‐
Different services layers ‐ Configuration scenarios of service layers. SOA delivery life cycle phases ‐ Agile
strategy ‐ SOA analysis ‐ Service modeling ‐ guidelines ‐ Classifications of service models.
MODULE 4 – TECHNOLOGIES AND DESIGN FOR SOA (9)
Introduction to Service oriented design – WSDL‐related XML schema language basics ‐ SOAP language
basis ‐ Service interface design tools ‐ SOA comparison guide lines ‐ Industry standards ‐ XML AWSOA
‐ WSDL and SOA ‐ SOAPAWAOA ‐ SOA extension.
MODULE 5 – SERVICE DESIGN AND SECURITY (9)
Service design ‐ WS ‐ BPEL language basics ‐ WS ‐ BPEL elements ‐ WS co ordination ‐ Service oriented
process design ‐ WS addressing language and messaging basis ‐ WS‐Policy language basics‐WS‐ Meta
data exchange ‐ Security language basis ‐ WSOA platforms ‐ SOA support in J2EE and .NET.
172
TEXT BOOKS
1 Thomas Erl, "Service‐Oriented Architecture: Concepts, Technology & Design", Pearson Education,
2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Thomas Erl, “Service‐Oriented Architecture: A Field Guide to Integrating XML and Web Services ",
The Prentice Hall, Service‐Oriented Computing Series, 2004.
2 Thomas Erl, “SOA Principles of Service Design", Prentice Hall Service‐Oriented Computing Series,
2007.
3 Shankar Kambhampaty, "Service Oriented Architecture for Enterprise Applications", 1st edition,
Wiley India Private Limited, 2008.
4 Mike Rosen, Boris Lublinsky, Kevin T. Smith and Marc J. Balcer, “Applied SOA Service Oriented
Architecture And Design Strategies", Wiley India, 2008.
5 Eric Newcomer Greg Lomow, "Understanding SOA with Web Services", Pearson Education, 2nd
edition, 2008.
6 Paul. C. Brown, "Implementing SOA Total Architecture in Practice", Pearson Edu, 2009.
7 Nicolai M. Josuttis, "SOA in Practice: The Art of Distributed System Design", 2nd Ed., 2008.
E BOOKS
http://ptgmedia.pearsoncmg.com/imprintdownloads/informit/promotions/LearnSOA/SOAeBook‐
1
InformIT.pdf
2 http://xml.coverpages.org/ErlThomas‐SOA2‐Ch16‐BPEL.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/service‐oriented‐architecture
173
COURSE TITLE OBJECT ORIENTED SYSTEM DESIGN CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Summarize the Object oriented life cycle. 1,2
2 Identify the solutions for the problems of complex systems, evolution of object‐
2,3,12
oriented model, classes, object‐oriented methodology and it notations.
3 Construct various UML models (including use case diagrams, class diagrams,
interaction diagrams, state chart diagrams, activity diagrams, an implementation 3,4,12
diagrams) using the appropriate notation for an application.
4 Recall object oriented analysis and design concepts. 1,2
5 Apply the object oriented design process for any application. 3,4,12
6 Gain enough competence in object‐oriented analysis and design (OOAD) to tackle a
3,4,12
Complete object oriented project.
Prerequisites :
An Overview of Object Oriented Systems Development ‐ Object Basics – Object Oriented Systems
Development Life Cycle.
MODULE 2: OBJECT ORIENTED METHODOLOGIES (9)
Rumbaugh Methodology ‐ Booch Methodology ‐ Jacobson Methodology ‐ Patterns – Frameworks –
Unified Approach – Unified Modeling Language – Use case ‐ class diagram ‐ Interactive Diagram ‐ Package
Diagram ‐ Collaboration Diagram ‐ State Diagram ‐ Activity Diagram.
MODULE 3: OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS (9)
Identifying use cases ‐ Object Analysis ‐ Classification – Identifying Object relationships ‐ Attributes and
Methods.
MODULE 4: OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN (9)
Design axioms ‐ Designing Classes – Access Layer ‐ Object Storage ‐ Object Interoperability.
MODULE 5: SOFTWARE QUALITY AND USABILITY (9)
Designing Interface Objects – Software Quality Assurance – System Usability ‐ Measuring User
Satisfaction‐ Case study: Application design and development using OOSD tools.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Ali Bahrami, “Object Oriented Systems Development”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, 2008.
2 Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled”, Second Edition, PHI Pearson Education, 2002.
174
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Stephen R. Schach, “Introduction to Object Oriented Analysis and Design”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, 2003.
2 James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, Grady Booch “The Unified Modeling Language Reference Manual”,
Addison Wesley, 1999.
3 Hans‐Erik Eriksson, Magnus Penker, Brain Lyons, David Fado, “UML Toolkit”, OMG Press Wiley
Publishing Inc., 2004.
E BOOKS
http://kmvportal.co.in/Course/OOAD/object‐oriented‐analysis‐and‐design‐with‐applications‐2nd‐
1
edition.pdf
2 https://edutechlearners.com/download/books/OOSE/OOAD.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/object‐oriented‐design
175
LIST OF DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES – SEMESTER VII

COURSE TITLE DEEP LEARNING CREDITS 3
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Develop algorithms simulating human brain. 2.3.4.8
2. Implement Neural Networks in Tensor Flow for solving problems. 2.3.4.8
3. Explore the essentials of Deep Learning and Deep Network architectures. 2.3.4.8
4. Define, train and use a Deep Neural Network for solving real world problems that
2.3.4.8
require artificial Intelligence based solutions.
Prerequisites :
MODULE 1 – BASICS OF DEEP LEANING (9)
Deep learning architectures: Convolutional Neural Networks : Neurons in Human Vision‐The
Shortcomings of Feature Selection‐Vanilla Deep Neural Networks Don’t Scale‐Filters and Feature Maps‐
Full Description of the Convolutional Layer‐Max Pooling‐Full Architectural Description of Convolution
Networks‐Closing the Loop on MNIST with Convolutional Networks‐Image Preprocessing Pipelines Enable
More Robust Models‐Accelerating Training with Batch Normalization‐Building a Convolutional Network
for CIFAR‐10‐Visualizing Learning in Convolutional Networks Leveraging Convolutional Filters to Replicate
Artistic Styles‐Learning Convolutional Filters for Other Problem Domains‐Training algorithms.
MODULE 2 – MEMORY AUGMENTED NEURAL NETWORKS (9)
Neural Turing Machines‐Attention‐Based Memory Access‐NTM Memory Addressing Mechanisms‐
Differentiable Neural Computers‐Interference‐Free Writing in DNCs‐DNC Memory Reuse‐Temporal
Linking of DNC Writes‐Understanding the DNC Read Head‐The DNC Controller Network Visualizing the
DNC in Action‐Implementing the DNC in Tensor Flow‐Teaching a DNC to Read and Comprehend.
MODULE 3 – DEEP REINFORCEMENT LEARNING (9)
Deep Reinforcement Learning Masters Atari Games What Is Reinforcement Learning?‐Markov Decision
Processes (MDP)‐Explore Versus Exploit‐Policy versus Value Learning‐Pole‐Cart with Policy Gradients‐Q‐
Learning and Deep Q‐Networks‐Improving and Moving Beyond DQN.
MODULE 4 – IMPLEMENTING NEURAL NETWORKS IN TENSORFLOW (9)

What Is TensorFlow?‐How Does TensorFlow Compare to Alternatives?‐Installing TensorFlow‐Creating
and Manipulating TensorFlow Variables‐TensorFlow Operations‐Placeholder Tensors‐Sessions in
TensorFlow‐Navigating Variable Scopes and Sharing Variables‐Managing Models over the CPU and GPU‐
Specifying the Logistic Regression Model in TensorFlow‐Logging and Training the Logistic Regression
Model‐Leveraging TensorBoard to Visualize Computation Graphs and Learning‐Building a Multilayer
Model for MNIST in TensorFlow.
176
MODULE 5 – APPLICATIONS (9)

Deep learning for computer vision, Deep Learning Applications at the Enterprise Scale, Deep Learning
Models for Healthcare Applications.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Nikhil Buduma, Nicholas Locascio, “Fundamentals of Deep Learning: Designing Next‐Generation
Machine Intelligence Algorithms”, O'Reilly Media, 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Ian Goodfellow, YoshuaBengio, Aaron Courville, ”Deep Learning (Adaptive Computation and
Machine Learning series”, MIT Press, 2017.
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/neural‐networks‐deep‐learning
2 https://in.udacity.com/course/deep‐learning‐‐ud730
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs41
COURSE TITLE HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL3
1 Develop parallel processing models and architecture. 2,3
2 Have an understanding on processor architecture and programming models. 1,2
3 Perform analysis of parallel algorithms. 3,4,5
4 Examine the design issues in parallel computing 2,3
5 Analyze the limitations of parallel computing. 2,3
6 Outline the advances in parallel computing models. 1,2,3
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1 – PARALLEL PROCESSING CONCEPTS (9)
Levels of parallelism: instruction‐ transaction‐ task‐ thread‐ memory‐ function, Models: SIMD‐ MIMD‐
SIMT‐ SPMD‐ Dataflow Models‐ Demand‐driven Computation, Architectures: N‐wide superscalar
architectures‐ multi‐core‐ multi‐threaded.
MODULE2–PARALLEL PROGRAMMING MODELS (9)
Processor Architecture, Interconnect, Communication, Memory Organization, and Programming Models
in high performance computing architectures: (Examples: IBM CELL BE, Nvidia Tesla GPU, Intel Larrabee
Micro architecture and Intel Nehalem micro architecture) ‐ Memory hierarchy and transaction specific
memory design ‐ Thread Organization.
177
MODULE 3 – FUNDAMENTAL DESIGN ISSUES IN PARALLEL COMPUTING (9)

Synchronization ‐ Scheduling ‐ Job Allocation ‐ Job Partitioning ‐ Dependency Analysis ‐ Mapping Parallel
Algorithms onto Parallel Architectures ‐ Performance Analysis of Parallel Algorithms. .
MODULE 4 – FUNDAMENTAL LIMITATIONS FACING PARALLEL COMPUTING (9)
Bandwidth Limitations ‐ Latency Limitations ‐ Latency Hiding/Tolerating Techniques and their limitations
‐ Power‐Aware Computing and Communication ‐ Power‐aware Processing Techniques ‐ Power‐aware
Memory Design ‐ Power‐aware Interconnect Design ‐ Software Power Management.
MODULE 5 – ADVANCED TOPICS (9)
Petascale Computing ‐ Optics in Parallel Computing ‐ Quantum Computers ‐ Recent developments in
Nanotechnology and its impact on HPC.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Kai Hwang, "Advanced Computer Architecture: Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability", McGraw
Hill Third Edition, 2011.
2 George S. Almasi and Alan Gottlieb, "Highly Parallel Computing" ,Benjamin ‐ Cummings Publishiing
company
3 David E.Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh, "Parallel Computer Architecture: A hardware/Software
Approach", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 1998.
4 Kai Hwang, "Scalable Parallel Computing", McGraw Hill 1998
5 William James Dally and Brian Towles, "Principles and Practices on Interconnection Networks",
Morgan Kauffman, 2004.
6 Hubert Nguyen, “GPU Gems 3”, Addison‐Wesley Professional, 2007.
7 Ananth Grama, Anshul Gupta, George Karypis, and Vipin Kumar, "Introduction to Parallel
Computing", 2nd edition, Addison‐Welsey, 2003.
8 David A. Bader (Ed.), "Petascale Computing: Algorithms and Applications", Chapman & Hall/CRC
Computational Science Series, 2007.
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ee40/
178
COURSE TITLE COMPUTER VISION CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSC4453 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0- 0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
1. Explain various recognition methodologies. 1,2,5,6
2. Describe the binary machine vision techniques. 1,2,5,6
3. Apply mathematical concepts for area extraction. 1,2,5,6
4. Elaborate the techniques to recognize various objects and image matching. 1,2,5,6
5. Describe the frameworks for matching and knowledge representation. 1,2,5,6
Prerequisites : Basic knowledge of Visual Computing, Image processing, Computer Graphics
MODULE 1 – RECOGNITION METHODOLOGY (9)
Recognition Methodology: Conditioning, Labeling, Grouping, Extracting, and Matching. Edge detection,
Gradient based operators, Morphological operators, Spatial operators for edge detection. Thinning,
Region growing, region shrinking, Labeling of connected components.
Suggested reading : https://www.tutorialspoint.com/dip/computer_vision_and_graphics.html.
MODULE 2 – BINARY MACHINE VISION (9)
Binary Machine Vision: Thresholding, Segmentation, Connected component labelling, Hierarchal
segmentation, Spatial clustering, Split & merge, Rule based Segmentation, Motion based segmentation.
Suggested reading : http://aishack.in/category/computer-vision/.
MODULE 3 – BINARY AREA EXTRACTION AND REGION ANALYSIS (9)
Area Extraction: Concepts, Data structures, Edge, Line Linking, Line detector ‐ Hough transform, Line
fitting, Curve fitting (Least square fitting). Region Analysis: Region properties, External points, Spatial
moments, Mixed spatial gray level moments, Boundary analysis: Signature properties, Shape numbers.
Edges – Canny, LOG, DOG.
Suggested reading : http://aishack.in/tutorials/hough-transform-basics/
MODULE 4 – OBJECT MODEL RECOGNITION AND MATCHING (9)
Facet Model Recognition: Labeling lines, Understanding line drawings, Classification of shapes by labeling
of edges, Recognition of shapes, consisting labeling problem, Back tracking, Perspective Projective
geometry, Inverse perspective Projection, Photogrammetry. From 2D to 3D, Image matching: Intensity
matching of ID signals, Matching of 2D image, Hierarchical image matching ‐ Object Models and Matching:
2D representation, Global vs. Local features.
Suggested reading : https://www.mathworks.com/solutions/deep‐learning/object‐recognition.html
179
MODULE 5 – GENERAL FRAMEWORKS AND KNOWLEDGE BASED VISION (9)

General Frame Works For Matching: Distance relational approach, Ordered structural matching, View
class matching, Models database organization. General Frame Works: Distance .relational approach,
Ordered .Structural matching, View class matching, Models database organization. Knowledge Based
Vision: Knowledge representation, Control‐strategies, Information Integration. Histogram based Image
Processing.
Suggested reading : https://github.com/yihui-he/computer-vision-tutorial
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. David A. Forsyth, Jean Ponce, “Computer Vision: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, 2011.
2. Wesley E. Snyder and Hairong Qui, “Fundamentals of Computer Vision”, Cambridge University Press,
2017.
3. Rajalingappaa Shanmugamani, “Deep Learning for Computer Vision: Expert techniques to train
advanced neural networks using TensorFlow and Keras”, Packt Publishing Limited, 2017.
4. Alexander Hornberg, “Handbook of Machine and Computer Vision: The Guide for Developers and
Users”, Wiley Publications, 2017.
5. Gustavo Olague, “Evolutionary Computer Vision: The First Footprints (Natural Computing Series)”,
Springer, Amazon Asia‐Pacific Holdings Private Limited, 2016.
6. R. Jain, R. Kasturi, and B. G. Schunk, “Machine Vision”, McGraw‐Hill, 1995.
E BOOKS
1 http://freecomputerbooks.com/Computer‐Vision‐Xiong‐Zhihui.html
MOOC
1 https://in.udacity.com/course/introduction‐to‐computer‐vision‐‐ud810
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ee08
3 https://www.edx.org/course/computer‐vision‐and‐image‐analysis
180
COURSE TITLE SECURITY GOVERNANCE RISK AND COMPLIANCE CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 State the basic concepts of GRC 1,2
2 Paraphrase security architecture 1,2,3
3 Paraphrase strategic metrics for security architecture 3,4
4 Demonstrate identification of risk 2,3
5 Implement Security strategy 3
6 Demonstrate and Interpret working with Security metrics 3,4
Prerequisites: Students should have a basic understanding of information security concepts.
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION (9)
Information Security Governance and outcomes, The CIA Triad: Confidentiality Integrity and
Availability, Benefits of Good Governance, Security Governance and Regulation, Applying security
governance principles -Organizational Processes, security roles and responsibilities, Compliance‐Types of
Legal System, Understanding legal and regulatory issues‐Computer Crime, ISC code of ethics.
MODULE 2 – STRATEGIC METRICS & SECURITY ARCHITECTURE (9)
Strategic metrics, Strategic Direction, Information Security outcomes‐ Strategic Alignment, Risk
Management, Business process assurance/convergence, Value delivery, Resource management,
Performance measurement, Security architecture, Security Control Framework‐ COBIT, OCTAVE, ISO
27000/31000
MODULE 3 – RISK MANAGEMENT (9)
Risk management responsibilities, Managing risk appropriately, Current State of Security, SABSA, CMM,
Cyber Security Task Force‐ Governance Framework, Gap Analysis – SABSA, CMM
MODULE 4 – SECURITY STRATEGY (9)
Strategy – Failure, Attributes, Resources, Constraints, Sample Strategy Development – The Process,
Implementing Strategy.
MODULE 5 – SECURITY METRICS (9)
Security program Development metrics, Information Security management metrics, CISO Decisions,
Information Security operational Metrics, Incident Management and Response Metrics.
TEXT BOOKS
1 KragBrotby, “Information Security Governance: A Practical Development and Implementation
Approach”, WILEY, 2009
181
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Alan Calder, Steve G. Watkins, “Information Security Risk Management for ISO27001/ISO27002”,
itgp, 2010.
E BOOKS
http://www.freetechbooks.com/managing‐risk‐and‐information‐security‐protect‐to‐enable‐
1
t1150.html
MOOC
1 https://www.udemy.com/cissp‐domain‐1‐security‐and‐risk‐management/
2 https://www.coursera.org/learn/cyber‐security‐domain/lecture/FLyKS/information‐security‐
governance‐and‐risk‐management
COURSE TITLE SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Review the basic software quality models, quality measurement and metrics. 1,2
2 Implement Quality plan, implementation and documentation. 2,3
3 Implement Quality tools including CASE tools, Quality control and reliability of
2,3
quality process.
4 Implement Quality management system model and Complexity metrics and
2,3
Customer Satisfaction.
5 Apply quality management system with various models ‐ Rayleigh, Reliability and
2,3,4
complexity models.
6 Demonstrate the International quality standards – ISO, CMM. 2,3
Prerequisites: Software Testing, Software Engineering
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE QUALITY (9)
Software Quality – Hierarchical models of Boehm and McCall – Quality measurement – Metrics
measurement and analysis – Gilb’s approach – GQM Model
MODULE2 –SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE (9)
Quality tasks – SQA plan – Teams – Characteristics – Implementation – Documentation – Reviews and
Audits
Suggestedreading:https://www.coursera.org/learn/engineering-practices-secure-software-quality
182
MODULE 3 – QUALITY CONTROL AND RELIABILITY (9)

Tools for Quality – Ishikawa’s basic tools – CASE tools – Defect prevention and removal – Reliability
models – Rayleigh model – Reliability growth models for quality assessment
Suggested reading : https://www.coursera.org/learn/software-design-methods-tools
MODULE 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (9)
Elements of QMS – Rayleigh model framework – Reliability Growth models for QMS – Complexity metrics
and models – Customer satisfaction analysis.
Suggested reading : https://www.coursera.org/learn/project-risk-quality-management
MODULE 5 – QUALITY STANDARDS (9)
Need for standards – ISO 9000 Series – ISO 9000‐3 for software development – CMM and CMMI – Six
Sigma concepts.
Suggested reading :https://www.coursera.org/learn/six-sigma-improve-control
TEXT BOOKS
1 Allan C. Gillies, “Software Quality: Theory and Management”, Thomson, 2011.
2 Stephen H. Kan, “Metrics and Models in Software Quality Engineering”, Pearson, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Norman Fenton,James Bieman “Software Metrics” Rigorous and Practical Approach, 2014.2
2 Mordechai Ben – Menachem and Garry S.Marliss, “Software Quality”, 2014
3 Mary Beth Chrissis, Mike Konrad and Sandy Shrum, “CMMI”, 2011.
E BOOKS
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/software quality managment/software quality management
1
tutorial.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org /learn/engineering‐practices‐source‐software‐quality
183
COURSE TITLE SOFTWARE DESIGN AND SYSTEM INTEGRATION CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Illustrate the basic concepts of program and project planning 1,2,11,12
2 Explain system engineering plan and identify software requirements 1,2
3 Realize the roles of agile process models 1,2,3
4 Build design and interpret the implementation process 2,3,4,12
5 Explain software integration, quality, risk and configuration management concepts 1,2
6 Explain software system delivery process 1,2
Prerequisites: Software engineering
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION, PROGRAM & PROJECT PLANNING (9)
Introduction : Software and system integration methods ‐ program and project planning ‐ System Design
‐ Software requirements ‐ Software Design and development ‐ Software implementation ‐ Integration ‐
Program and Project Planning: Program ‐ Project ‐ Planning ‐ Senior Management ‐ Senior Management ‐
Program and project planning ‐ Planned schedules ‐ development plan ‐ Team work ‐ Team code of
conduct.
MODULE 2 – SYSTEM DESIGN & SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (9)
Systems Design : Definition ‐ System Engineering plan ‐ Software architecture evaluation ‐ Software
requirements: Definition ‐ Requirements documentation ‐ Managing a requirements tool ‐ released
software requirements
MODULE 3 – SOFTWARE DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION (9)
Software Design : Development plan ‐ Software Design decisions ‐Peer reviews ‐ Software
design/development ‐Agile software process ‐ Configuration Management ‐ Software Standards‐ CMMI,
Software Implementation: Configuration Management ‐ Configuration Management Tools ‐ Software
Media and Data‐ Future trends
MODULE 4 – SOFTWARE AND SYSTEM INTEGRATION (9)
Software Integration : Software Integration strategy ‐ Development facility ‐ Software Integration plan ‐
Software Systems and Integration facility ‐ Integration setup ‐ Test team ‐ Quality participation in software
and systems integration ‐ Effective methods for software system integration ‐ Risk Management ‐
Requirements ‐ System integration ‐ continuous integration ‐ configuration management ‐quality.
MODULE 5 – SOFTWARE SUBCONTRACTOR & SYSTEM DELIVERY (9)
Software Subcontractor ‐ Software and system delivery: Software media and data delivery ‐ Product
evaluation.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Boyd L. Summers, Effective methods for Software and Systems Integration , CRC, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Enterprise Integration by Fred A.Cummins, John Wiley and Sons 2002.
184
COURSE TITLE MOBILE TECHNOLOGY CREDITS 3

CIA 50% ESE 50%
1 Differentiate the various mobile architectures and their applications 1,2
2 Apply telephony based mobile application for realtime issues 2,3
3 Explain the various messaging environment in mobile environments. 1,2
4 Acquire knowledge on 5G and latest technology 2,3
5 Apply Web development in iOS and Android Development Platforms. 3,4,5,12
6 Develop web applications for mobile devices 3,4,5,12
Prerequisites : Nil
Introduction: Mobility of Bits and Bytes – Wireless‐The Beginning – Mobile Computing – Dialogue
Control– Networks – Middleware and Gateways – Application and Services (Contents) Developing
Mobile Computing Applications‐ Security in Mobile Computing – Standards‐ Standard Bodies
Mobile Computing Architecture: Internet‐The Ubiquitous Network – Architecture for Mobile
Computing – Three‐Tier Architecture – Design Considerations for Mobile Computing – Mobile
Computing through Internet
MODULE 2: MOBILE COMPUTING ARCHITECTURE (9)

Mobile Computing Through Telephony: Multiple Access Procedures – Mobile Computing through
Telephone –Voice XML – Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM): GSM Architecture – Entities – Call Routing in GSM
– GSM Addresses and Identifiers – Network Aspects in GSM – GSM Frequency Allocation.
CDMA and 5G: Introduction – Spread‐Spectrum Technology – IS‐95 – CDMA Vs GSM –
Wireless Data – 5G Networks & Applications
MODULE 3: GPRS AND TELEPHONY APPLICATIONS (9)
GPRS: Packet Data Network – Network Architecture – Network Operations – Data Services inGPRS –
Applications for GPRS – Limitations. Short Message Service (SMS): Mobile Computing over SMS – SMS
– Value Added Services through SMS –Accessing the SMS Bearer. Emerging Technologies: Introduction
– Bluetooth – Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),WiMAX –Mobile IP – IPv6
MODULE 4: MOBILE WEB DEVELOPMENT (9)
ANDROID and IOS: History of ios and Android – How Android and iOS Differ – How their Browsers
Differ.
Web Development for Mobile Devices: overview of HTML5 – CSS3 – JavaScript Support ‐ Different
JavaScript Engines –CSS Media Queries – Responsive Design.
185
MODULE 5: PROGRAMMING FOR THE ANDROID OS (9)

Programming for the Android OS: Introduction – Android Architecture – Activities and Fragments –
Android Intents – Android Process Model – Android Multimedia – Android Location – Android AR –
Android Sensors – Android Local Storage and Databases – Android Networking.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Asoke K Talukder& Roopa R.Yavagal, “Mobile Computing – Technology Applications and Service
Creation”, TMH 2010.
2 David Griffiths, Dawn Griffiths, “Head First Android Development: A Brain‐Friendly Guide”, 2nd
Edition Publisher: O'Reilly Media 2017
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Uwe Hansmann, LotherMerk, Martin S.Nicklous, Thomas Staber, “Principles of Computing”, 2/e,
Springer International Edition, 2009
2 J.Schiller, “Mobile communications”, Addison‐Wesley, 2003
E BOOKS
1 https://manyebooks.org/download/head_first_android_development_2e.pdf
2 https://www.cs.auckland.ac.nz/courses/compsci105ssc/resources/CourseBook.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.classcentral.com/tag/mobile%20technology
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc16_cs13/preview
186

Cbcs-Computerscience-2018 220622 192641

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cbcs-Computerscience-2018 220622 192641

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS

(Applicable for Students admitted from Academic Year 2018-19)

B. Tech. Computer Science Engineering

SCHOOL OF COMPUTING SCIENCES

HINDUSTAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING

B. Tech. Computer Science and Engineering

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (ALIGNED WITH GRADUATE ATTRIBUTES) (PO)

At the end of this program, graduates will be able to

PO1: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSO)

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR

II. DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

4. “Vice – Chancellor of HITS” means the Head of the Institution.

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR B. Tech. / B.Tech. (Hons.)

 To nurture creativity and innovation.

 To instil highest ethical standards and values.

 To pursue activities for the development of the Society.

 To develop national and international collaborations with institutes and industries of

 To enable graduates to become future leaders and innovators.

1.3 Aims and Objectives of the Institute are focused on

2.1. Eligibility for Admission

(i) Regular Entry

(ii) Lateral Entry

3.0 Student Discipline

4.0 Structure of the B. Tech Degree Programme

ii) Compulsory Courses (CC) consist of the following.

iv) Indexed Journal / Conference Publications: If a student publishes a research paper

4.4 Non – CGPA courses

Table 1. Non – CGPA Courses

Table 2. Distribution of Credits

5.0 Faculty Advisor

5.1 Class Committee

e. Workshop Superintendent (for first two semesters); as applicable.

5.4 Course committee

6.0 Registration for courses in a Semester

7.0 B. Tech, (Honours) Programme

8.0 B. Tech with Minor specialization:

a. The number of credits to be earned for Minor specialization is 12 credits.

10.0 Assessment Procedure

10.1 Theory Course / DE / NE Assessment weightages

Table 4(b): Weightage for Assessment

10.4 Design Project – Assessment

10.5 Comprehension – Assessment

Table 6: Assessment pattern for Comprehension

11.0 Procedures for Course Repetition / Repeat Examinations

12.0 Progression to higher semester

12.2 B.Tech.- Lateral Entry

To enroll for semester Minimum no. of credits to be earned

13.0 Maximum Duration of the Programme

14.0 Temporary Withdrawal from the Programme

15.0 Declaration of results

16.1 A grading system as shown in Table 10 will be followed.

Table 10: Grading system

70‐79 B 08 Very Good

<45 U 00 To Reappear for end‐semester examination

Repeat Course (Summer / Winter) due to

16.2 GPA and CGPA

17.0 Grade Sheet

18.1 Classification is based on CGPA and is as follows:

19.0 Transfer of credits

21.0 Change of Discipline